2024-09-10; City Council; 08; Monroe Street Pool Renovation and Replacement Project Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents, Appropriation of Construction Funding, and Authorization to Advertise — Carlsbad City Council, September 10, 2024 (part 6 of 11)

END OF SECTION 22 45 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 1
SECTION 23 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping tube and fitting materials.

2. Pipe joining materials.

3. Transition fittings.

4. Sleeves.

5. Escutcheons.

6. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.

7. Painting and finishing.

8. Supports and anchorages.

1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.

Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

3. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:

1. All pipe materials & accessoires applicable for scope of work under this section.

2. Mechanical sleeve seals.

3. Escutcheons.

B. Welding certificates.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.05 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 2
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section 083100 "Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.02 PIPE JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.03 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

1. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.

2. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling.

3. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.

B. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

2.04 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw. Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

E. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

F. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

1. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

2. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

3. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

4. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

5. Install piping at indicated slopes.

6. Install piping free of sags and bends.

7. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

8. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

C. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

3.02 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast- brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough- brass finish.
g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type. h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.

3.03 PENETRATIONS AND SLEEVES
A. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

B. Install sleeves for pipes passing through gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.

3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board partitions.
b. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.

Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
c. Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

C. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.

2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.

3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 4
D. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.

E. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

F. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.04 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

3.05 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.06 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Grease fittings shall be installed in accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.07 PAINTING
A. Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9.

B. Ductwork that will be painted, provide galvannealed/paintlock from sheetmetal fabricator LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 5
C. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.08 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

END OF SECTION 230130 23 05 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and
Equipment 23 05 29 - 1
SECTION 23 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal Channel Strut Framing Systems
B. Hanger Rods
C. Pipe Supports
D. Beam Clamps
E. Riser Clamps
F. Pipe Hangers
G. Anchors & Fastners
H. Trapeze pipe hangers
I. Equipment Supports

1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment and components to be installed.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials required for installation.

3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at the installed locations.

4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. PRODUCT DATA: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for channel (strut) framing systems, nonpenetrating rooftop supports, post-installed concrete and masonry anchors, and thermal insulated pipe supports.

1. Fiberglass Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Include requirements for strength derating according to ambient temperature.

B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Include details for fabricated hangers and supports where materials or methods other than those indicated are proposed for substitution.

1. Application of protective inserts, saddles, and shields at pipe hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

C. MFG INSTRUCTIONS: Indicate manufacturer application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with applicable building code.

B. Installer Qualifications for Powder-Actuated Fasteners (when specified): Certified by fastener system manufacturer with current operator's license.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. General Requirements:

1. Comply with MSS SP-58.

2. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and hardware as necessary for the complete installation of plumbing work.

3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended, where applicable.

4. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be supported with a minimum safety factor of 2x. Include consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable.

5. Do not use wire, chain, perforated pipe strap, or wood for permanent supports unless specifically indicated or permitted.

6. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where installed.
a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated.
b. Outdoor or Wet Indoor Locations: Use stainless steel or hot dipped galvanized steel.
1) Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633. 2) Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.

B. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel (strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of supports.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle. b. Ferguson Enterprises Inc: www.fnw.com/#sle.
c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.
d. Unistrut, a brand of Atkore International Inc: www.unistrut.com/#sle. e. Tomarco

2. Provide factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel (strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of supports.

3. Comply with MFMA-4.

4. Channel Material:
a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use painted steel, zinc-plated steel, or galvanized steel. b. Indoor Mechanical Room Locations: Use stainless steel 304 channel and rods.

5. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gauge, 0.1046 inch.

6. Minimum Channel Dimensions: 1-5/8 inch width by 13/16 inch height.

C. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated. For rod sizes see drawing details
D. Thermal Insulated Pipe Supports:

1. General Construction and Requirements:
a. Insulated pipe supports to be provided at hanger, support, and guide locations on pipe requiring insulation or additional support.
b. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/smoke developed index of 5/30, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. c. Pipe supports to be provided for nominally sized, 1/2 inch to 30 inch iron pipes. d. Insulation inserts to consist of rigid polyisocyanurate (urethane) insulation surrounded by a 360 degree, PVC jacketing.

2. PVC Jacket:
a. Pipe insulation protection shields to be provided with a ball bearing hinge and locking seam.
b. Moisture Vapor Transmission: 0.0071 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
c. Thickness: 60 mil.

3. Pipe insulation protection shields to be provided at the hanger points and guide locations on pipes requiring insulation as indicated on drawings.

1. Liquid Temperatures Up To 122 degrees F:
a. Overhead Support: MSS SP-58 Types 1, 3 through 12.
b. Support From Below: MSS SP-58 Types 35 through 38.

2. Operating Temperatures from 122 to 446 degrees F:
a. Overhead Support: MSS SP-58 Type 1 or 3 through 12, with appropriate saddle of MSS SP-58 Type 40 for insulated pipe.
b. Roller Support: MSS SP-58 Types 41 or 43 through 46, with appropriate saddle of MSS SP-58 Type 39 for insulated pipe.

F. Pipe Stanchions: For pipe runs, use stanchions of same type and material where vertical adjustment is required for stationary pipe.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Anvil International; H-Block: www.anvilintl.com/#sle. b. Approved Equal.

2. Material: Malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M; or carbon steel, ASTM A36/A36M.

3. Provide coated or plated saddles to isolate steel hangers from dissimilar metal tube or pipe.

G. Trapeze Pipe Hangers: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop or field fabricated pipe support assembly made from structural steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-Bolts H. Beam Clamps: MSS SP-58 Types 19 through 23, 25 or 27 through 30 based on required load.

1. Material: ASTM A36/A36M carbon steel or ASTM A181/A181M forged steel.

2. Provide clamps with hardened steel cup-point set screws and lock-nuts for anchoring in place.

I. Riser Clamps:

1. Provide copper plated clamps for copper tubing support.

J. Strut Clamps: Two-piece pipe clamp.

K. Insulation Clamps: Two bolt-type clamps designed for installation under insulation.

L. Pipe Hangers: For a given pipe run, use hangers of the same type and material.

1. Material: Malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M; or carbon steel, ASTM A36/A36M.

2. Provide coated or plated hangers to isolate steel hangers from dissimilar metal tube or pipe.

M. Pipe Shields for Insulated Piping:

1. General Construction and Requirements:
a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84 or UL 723. b. Shields Material: UV-resistant polypropylene with glass fill. c. Maximum Insulated Pipe Outer Diameter: 12-5/8 inch. d. Minimum Service Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F.
e. Maximum Service Temperature: 178 degrees F.
f. Pipe shields to be provided at hanger, support, and guide locations on pipe requiring insulation or additional support.

N. Anchors and Fasteners:

1. Manufacturers - Mechanical Anchors:
a. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com/#sle.
b. ITW Red Head, a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc: www.itwredhead.com/#sle. c. Powers Fasteners, Inc: www.powers.com/#sle.
d. Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc: www.strongtie.com/#sle. e. Approved Equal.

2. Manufacturers - Powder-Actuated Fastening Systems:
a. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com/#sle.
b. ITW Ramset, a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc: www.ramset.com/#sle. c. Powers Fasteners, Inc: www.powers.com/#sle.
d. Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc: www.strongtie.com/#sle.

3. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener types indicated for the specified applications.

4. Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts, expansion anchors, or screw anchors.

5. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors.

6. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts.

7. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts.

8. Steel: Use beam clamps, machine bolts, or welded threaded studs.

9. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.

10. Wood: Use wood screws.

11. Plastic and lead anchors are not permitted.

12. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel (strut) and spot inserts specifically designed to be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors. a. Comply with MFMA-4.
b. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel.
c. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gauge, 0.1046 inch minimum base metal thickness.
d. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel (strut) framing system.

13. Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Evaluated and recognized by ICC Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES) for compliance with applicable building code.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services, LLC (ICC-ES) evaluation report conditions of use where applicable.

C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, conduit, or other systems.

D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid.

E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof deck.

F. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer.

G. Provide thermal insulated pipe supports complete with hangers and accessories. Install thermal insulated pipe supports during the installation of the piping system.

H. Equipment Support and Attachment:

1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to support equipment as required.

2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.

3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface.

4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own weight for support.

I. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer-provided closure strips to inhibit concrete seepage during concrete pour.

J. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

K. Remove temporary supports.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and
Equipment 23 05 29 - 5
B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.

C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components.

END OF SECTION 23 05 29
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC 23 05 48 - 1
SECTION 23 05 48

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Vibration isolation requirements.

B. Seismic control requirements.

1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. HVAC Component: Where referenced in this section in regards to seismic controls, applies to any portion of the HVAC system subject to seismic evaluation in accordance with applicable codes, including distributed systems (e.g. ductwork, piping).

B. Seismic Restraint: Structural members or assemblies of members or manufactured elements specifically designed and applied for transmitting seismic forces between components and the seismic force-resisting system of the structure.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures; Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard.

B. ASCE 19 - Structural Applications of Steel Cables for Buildings; 2016.

C. ASHRAE (HVACA) - ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications; Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard.

D. IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel AC172; 2019.

E. SMACNA (SRM) - Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems; 2008.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate selection and arrangement of vibration isolation and/or seismic control components with the actual equipment to be installed.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials required for installation.

3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at the installed locations.

4. Seismic Controls:
a. Coordinate the arrangement of seismic restraints with piping, conduit, equipment, and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. b. Coordinate the work with other trades to accommodate relative positioning of essential and non-essential components in consideration of seismic interaction.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. SHOP DRAWINGS - Vibration Isolation & Seismic Controls Systems:

1. Provide table schedule of vibration isolator type & seismic restraint system with equipment tag, location and loads.

2. Include auxiliary motor slide bases and rails, base weights, inertia bases, concrete weights, equipment static loads, support points, vibration isolators, and detailed layout of isolator location and orientation with static and dynamic load on each isolator.

3. Vibration Isolation Shops -
a. Vibration Isolation Systems: Include scaled fabrication plans, installation details & sections indicating proposed arrangement of vibration isolators and static deflections.
b. Vibration-Isolated Equipment Support Bases:
1) Include base weights, including concrete fill where applicable; indicate equipment mounting provisions, attachments to isolators and supported equipment.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC 23 05 48 - 2
2) Vibration Isolation Curbs provide OPM Certification by manufacturer, and associated calculations

4. Seismic Restraint Shops -
a. Provide all calculations from prescriptive design tables that indicate compliance with the applicable building code for seismic controls along with load and capacity assumptions.
b. Include the seal of the Professional Structural Engineer registered in the State of California in which the Project is located, on drawings and calculations which at a minimum include the following:
1) Seismic Restraint Details: Detailed drawings of seismic restraints and snubbers including anchorage details that indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration, edge distance, and spacing of anchors.

5. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions with special procedures and setting dimensions.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with applicable building code.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than 20 years of documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 VIBRATION ISOLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Design and provide vibration isolation systems to reduce vibration transmission to supporting structure from vibration-producing HVAC equipment and/or HVAC connections to vibration- isolated equipment.

B. Comply with applicable general recommendations of ASHRAE (HVACA), where not in conflict with other specified requirements:

C. General Requirements:

1. Select vibration isolators to provide required static deflection.

2. Select vibration isolators for uniform deflection based on distributed operating weight of actual installed equipment.

D. Equipment Isolation: As indicated on drawings.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc: www.kineticsnoise.com/#sle.

B. Mason Industries: www.mason-ind.com/#sle.

C. Tomarco ISAT: http://www.tomarco.com/isat.html
D. MW Sause Vibrex: https://www.vibrex.net/
E. [Approved Equal]

2.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General:

1. All vibration isolators, base frames and inertia bases to conform to all uniform deflection and stability requirements under all operating loads.

2. Steel springs to function without undue stress or overloading.

3. Steel springs to operate in the linear portion of the load versus deflection curve over deflection range of not less than 50 percent above specified deflection.

4. Lateral to vertical stiffness ratio to not exceed 0.08 with spring deflection at minimum 75 percent of specified deflection.

5. All equipment mounted on vibration isolated bases to have minimum operating clearance of 2 inches between the base and floor or support beneath unless noted otherwise.

2.04 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS FOR SUSPENDED COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT A. Description: System components and accessories specifically designed for field assembly and attachment of seismic restraints.

B. Cable Restraints:

1. Comply with ASCE 19.

2. Cables: Pre-stretched, galvanized steel wire rope with certified break strength.

3. Cable Connections: Use only swaged end fittings. Cable clips and wedge type end fittings are not permitted in accordance with ASCE 19.

4. Use protective thimbles for cable loops where potential for cable damage exists.

C. Rigid Restraints: Use MFMA-4 steel channel (strut), steel angle, or steel pipe for structural element; suitable for both compressive and tensile design loads.

D. Comply with:

1. SMACNA (SRM).

E. Cable Restraints:

1. Wire Rope: Steel wire strand cables sized to resist seismic loads in all lateral directions.

2. Protective Thimbles: Eliminates potential for dynamic cable wear and strand breakage.

3. Size: Based on the lesser of cable capacity or anchor load taking into account bracket geometry.

4. Connections:
a. Use overlapping wire rope U clips, cable clamping bolts, swaged sleeves or seismically rated tool-less wedge insert lock connectors. b. Internally brace clevis hanger bracket cross bolt to prevent deformation.

5. Vertical Suspension Rods: Attach required bracing of sufficient strength to prevent rod buckling from vertical compression forces utilizing series of attachment clips.

F. Rigid Restraints:

1. Structural Element: Sized to resist seismic loads in all lateral directions and carry both compressive and tensile loading.

2. Size: Based on the lesser of cable capacity or anchor load taking into account bracket geometry.

3. Connections: Internally brace clevis hanger bracket cross bolt to prevent deformation.

4. Static Support System: Anchorage capable of carrying additional tension loads generated by the vertical component of the rigid brace compression which is additive to any static load requirements on the system.

5. Vertical Suspension Rods: Attached required bracing of sufficient strength to prevent rod buckling from vertical compression forces utilizing series of attachment clips.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Bases:

1. Set steel & concrete inertia bases for 2 inches clearance between housekeeping pad and base.

2. Adjust equipment level.

C. On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions.

D. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal.

E. Provide pairs of horizontal limit springs on fans with more than 6.0 inches WC static pressure, and on hanger supported, horizontally mounted axial fans.

F. Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators or resilient hangers for scheduled distance.

1. Up to 4 Inches Pipe Size: First three points of support.

2. 5 to 8 Inches Pipe Size: First four points of support.

3. 10 inches Pipe Size and Over: First six points of support.

4. Select three hangers closest to vibration source for minimum 1.0 inch static deflection or static deflection of isolated equipment. Select remaining isolators for minimum 1.0 inch static deflection or 1/2 static deflection of isolated equipment.

3.02 INSTALLATION - SEISMIC
A. Comply with:

1. SMACNA (SRM).

B. Floor and Base-Mounted Equipment, Vibration Isolated Equipment and associated Vibration and Seismic Controls for Connections:

1. Install equipment anchorage items designed to resist seismic design force in any direction.

2. Install vibration and seismic controls designed to include base and isolator requirements.

3. Provide flexible connections between equipment and interconnected piping.

4. Provide isolators and restraints designed for amplified code forces per ASCE 7 and with demonstrated ability to resist required forces including gravity, operational and seismic forces.

5. Where equipment is not designed to be point loaded, provide base capable of transferring gravity and seismic demands from equipment to isolator base plate anchorage.

6. Where concrete floor thickness is less than required for expansion anchor installation, install through bolt in lieu of expansion anchor.

7. Where timber/wood floor or other substrate is inadequate for installation of lag bolts, screws or other mechanical fasteners, install supplemental framing or blocking to transfer loads to structural elements.

C. Suspended Mechanical Equipment:

1. Provide supports and bracing to resist seismic design force in any direction.

2. Provide flexible connections between equipment and interconnected piping.

3. Brace equipment hung from spring mounts using cable or other bracing that will not transmit vibration to the structure.

4. Use of proprietary restraint systems with a certificate of compliance, verified and listed by an accredited inspection body is acceptable (pending shop drawing approval), as an alternative to project specific seismic bracing design.

D. Wall mounted Mechanical Equipment:

1. Provide support and bracing to resist seismic design force in any direction.

2. Install backing plates or blocking as required to deliver load to primary wall framing members.

3. Anchoring to gypsum wallboard, plaster or other wall finish that has not been engineered to resist imposed loads is not permitted.

E. Piping:

1. Provide seismic bracing in accordance ASCE 7.

2. Provide supports, braces, and anchors to resist gravity and seismic design forces.

3. Provide flexible connections between floor mounted equipment and suspended piping; between unbraced piping and restrained suspended items; as required for thermal movement; at building separations and seismic joints; and wherever relative differential movements could damage pipe in an earthquake.

4. Brace resiliently supported pipe with cable bracing or alternate means designed to prevent transmission of vibrations and noise to the structure.

5. Brace spacing shall be per drawing detail in length with two transverse and one longitudinal bracing locations.

6. Pipes and Connections Constructed of Ductile Materials (copper, ductile iron, steel or aluminum and brazed, welded or screwed connections):

7. Pipes and Connections Constructed of Non Ductile Materials (cast iron, no-hub, plastic or non-UL listed grooved coupling pipe):

8. Provide lateral restraint for risers at not more than 30 feet on center or as required for horizontal runs, whichever is less.

9. Piping Explicitly Exempt from Seismic Bracing Requirements:
a. Provide flexible connections between piping and connected equipment, including in- line devices such as VAV boxes and reheat coils.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC 23 05 48 - 5
b. Install piping consistent with ASCE 7, such that swinging of the pipes will not cause damaging impact with adjacent components, finishes, or structural framing while maintaining clear horizontal distance of 67 percent of the hanger length between subject components.
c. Provide swing restraints as required to control potential impact due to limited space between subject components.

10. Use of proprietary restraint systems with a certificate of compliance, verified and listed by an accredited inspection body is acceptable (pending shop drawing approval), as an alternative to project specific seismic bracing design.

11. Re-use of Existing Hangers:
a. Re-using existing hangers at locations of seismic bracing are to be judged on a case- by-case basis by the registered project design professional. b. Unless otherwise shown on drawings, it is assumed all hangers supporting new piping, located at a seismic brace, will be new.

F. Ductwork:

1. Provide seismic bracing for ducts with cross sectional area greater than 6 SQ FT in cross sectional area (independent of duct contents).

2. Provide seismic bracing for all ducts containing hazardous materials.

3. Provide supports, braces, and anchors to resist gravity and seismic design forces.

4. Install ducts and duct risers designed to accommodate interstory drift.

5. Independently support in-line devices weighing more than 20 lbs / LF.

6. Independently support and brace all in-line devices weighing more than 75 pounds.

7. Provide unbraced piping attached to braced in-line equipment with adequate flexibility to accommodate differential displacements.

8. Positively attach dampers, louvers, diffusers and similar appurtenances to ductwork with mechanical fasteners.

9. Install duct supports designed to resist not less than 150 percent of the duct weight.

10. The use of power driven fasteners is prohibited in the hanging of ducts weighing over 10 pounds per lineal foot for seismic design categories D, E, and F.

11. Use of proprietary restraint systems with a certificate of compliance, verified and listed by an IAS AC172 accredited inspection body or otherwise accepted by Authority Having Jirisdiction is acceptable (pending shop drawing approval), as an alternative to project specific seismic bracing design.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Vibration Isolation Systems:

1. Verify isolator static deflections.

2. Verify vibration isolation performance during normal operation; investigate sources of isolation short circuits.

B. Inspect isolated equipment after installation and submit report. Include static deflections.

3.04 SCHEDULE
A. Equipment Isolation Schedule.

1. Refer to Drawings.

END OF SECTION 23 05 48
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 53 - 1 SECTION 23 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nameplates.

B. Tags.

C. Adhesive-backed duct markers.

D. Pipe markers.

E. Ceiling tacks.

F. Duct Labels.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. SCHEDULE: Submit FULL IDENTIFICATION TABLE/SCHEDULE to include:

1. Nameplate Tag Format

2. Pipe Valve Tag Format

3. Duct Label Tag Format

4. System Type

5. Symbols

6. Letter Sizes

7. Color Coding.

B. PRODUCT DATA: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required C. SAMPLES: Provide examples/samples for owner review of the following:

1. Equipment Nameplates
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS
A. Rooftop Units: Nameplates.

B. Control Panels: Nameplates.

C. Ductwork: Duct Labels.

D. Major Control Components: Nameplates.

E. Piping: Pipe markers.

F. Small-sized Equipment - Fans, Split Systems, VRF Systems: Nameplates G. Thermostats: Tags
H. Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling.

2.02 NAMEPLATES
A. Manufacturers:

1. Craftmark Pipe Markers

2. Seton Identification Products / Tricor Direct / Brady Corporation

3. Kolbi Pipe Marker Company

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temparatures up to 160 deg F E. Multi-layered metalized polyester with permanent adhesive for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

1. Letter Color: Black.

2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch, for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.minimum.

3. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but NO LESS THAN 2-1/2" by 3/4 inch.

4. Background Color: WHITE.

5. Plastic: Coforms to ASTM D709.

6. Fastners: Stainless-steel rivets or self tapping screws

7. Adhesive: Contact type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate

2.03 TAGS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Craftmark Pipe Markers

2. Seton Identification Products / Tricor Direct / Brady Corporation

3. Kolbi Pipe Marker Company
B. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.

C. Content: Minimum information indicating unique valve or insturment tag D. Metal Tags: Stainless Steel with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges.

2.04 ADHESIVE-BACKED DUCT LABELS
A. Material: Multilayer, multicolor high gloss acrylic adhesive-backed vinyl film 0.0032 inch; printed with UV and chemical resistant inks.

B. Style: Individual Label.

C. Letter Color: Black
D. Background Color: Blue
E. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

G. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to threefourths the size of principal lettering
H. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.

2.05 PIPE MARKERS
A. Refrigerant Piping

1. Background Color: Yellow

2. Letter Color: Black
B. Content: Minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed.

C. Size:

1. Up to 2 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field,

2. Over 2 inch Outside Diameter of Insualtion or Pipe: 12 inch long color field, 1-1/2 inch high letters.

D. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering.

2.06 CEILING TACKS
A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color coded head.

1. HVAC Equipment: Yellow.

2. Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers: Red.

3. Heating/Cooling Valves: Blue.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.

C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install ductwork with duct labels. Install plastic-laminated duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:

1. Blue: For cold-air supply ducts

2. Green: For exhaust, outside, relief, return, and mixed air ducts

3. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs

4. Maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling systems.

E. Identify with air handling unit identification number and area served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

END OF SECTION 23 05 53
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 05 93 - 1 SECTION 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of AIR SIDE systems.

B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.

C. Commissioning activities.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AABC (NSTSB) - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance, 7th Edition; 2016.

B. AABC MN-1 - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; 2002.

C. ASHRAE Std 111 - Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building HVAC Systems; 2008, with Errata (2019).

D. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standard for Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems; 2019.

E. SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing; 2002.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be followed and the specific approach for each system and component.

1. Submit to the Commissioning Authority.

2. Submit six weeks prior to starting the testing, adjusting, and balancing work.

3. Include certification that the plan developer has reviewed the contract documents, the equipment and systems, and the control system with the Architect and other installers to sufficiently understand the design intent for each system.

4. Include at least the following in the plan:
a. DUCTWORK LEAKAGE TESTING:
1) Ductwork and components shall be tested in accordance to 2022 CMC 603.10 with a pressure of not less than one and one-half times (1.5x) the external static pressure but not less than 2" WG. Representative sections shall total no less than 10 percent of the total existing and new duct area shall be tested. Testing shall be witnessed by commissioning agent, and if desired by owner. 2) Where the tested 10 percent fail to comply with the requirements of 603.10.1, then 40 percent of the total installed duct area shall be tested. 3) Where the tested 40 percent fail to comply with the requirements of this section, then 100 percent of the total installed duct area shall be tested. 4) Sections shall be selected by the building owner or designated representative of the building owner. Positive pressure leakage testing shall be permitted for negative pressure ductwork.
b. REFRIGERANT PIPING TESTING:
1) See 232300 Refrigeration Piping Specification
c. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency measurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to be used.
d. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment to be tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each. e. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and piping drawings during the process.
f. Final test report forms to be used.
g. Details of how TOTAL flow will be determined; for example:
1) Air: Sum of terminal flows via control system calibrated readings or via hood readings of all terminals, supply (SA) and return air (RA) pitot traverse, SA or RA flow stations.
2) Water: Pump curves, circuit setter, flow station, ultrasonic, etc.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 05 93 - 2 h. Specific procedures that will ensure that both air and water side are operating at the lowest possible pressures and methods to verify this.
i. Confirmation of understanding of the outside air ventilation criteria under all conditions.
j. Method of verifying and setting minimum outside air flow rate will be verified and set and for what level (total building, zone, etc.).
k. Method of checking building static and exhaust fan and/or relief damper capacity. l. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution.

B. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.

1. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report.

2. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Architect and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.

3. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of calibration.

4. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111.

5. Units of Measure: Report data in both I-P (inch-pound) and SI (metric) units.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform total system balance in accordance with the following:

1. AABC (NSTSB), AABC National Standards for Total System Balance.

2. ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.

3. SMACNA (TAB).

B. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work prior to Substantial Completion of the project.

C. Coordinate support required of EMS Controls contractor prior to start of TAB activities D. Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, including fire and smoke detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing and inspection procedures with the authorities having jurisdiction.

E. TAB Agency Qualifications:

1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section.

2. Having minimum of TEN years documented experience.

3. Certified by one of the following:
a. AABC, Associated Air Balance Council: www.aabc.com/#sle; upon completion submit AABC National Performance Guaranty.
b. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org/#sle.

4. Testing agency must also be certified by Acceptance Testing Technician ATT program available by California Energy Commission CEC.
a. ATT will test all mechanical systems per NRCC-MCH-E Forms b. The acceptance testing procedures must be repeated and deficiences must be corrected by the buildier or installing contractor until the construction/installation of the specified systems conform and pass the required acceptance criteria. c. More infomration regarding CEC ATT can be found here https://www.energy.ca.gov/programs-and-topics/programs/acceptance-test- technician-certification-provider-program/acceptance

3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions:

1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.

2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.

3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.

4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters.

5. Duct systems are clean of debris.

6. Fans are rotating correctly.

7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.

8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.

9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.

10. Air outlets are installed and connected.

11. Duct system leakage is minimized.

12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented.

13. Pumps are rotating correctly.

14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place.

15. Service and balance valves are open.

B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prevent proper system balance.

C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.03 PREPARATION
A. Hold a pre-balancing meeting at least one week prior to starting TAB work.

3.04 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES
A. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

3.05 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING
A. Field Logs: Maintain written logs including:

1. Running log of events and issues.

2. Discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others.

3. Contract interpretation requests.

4. Lists of completed tests.

B. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.

C. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.

D. Mark on drawings the locations where traverse and other critical measurements were taken and cross reference the location in the final report.

E. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified.

F. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

3.06 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude.

B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.

C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.

D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise.

E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters.

F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required.

Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 05 93 - 4 G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.

H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.

I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.

J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage.

K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full heating.

L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure near the building entries.

M. Check multi-zone units for motorized damper leakage. Adjust air quantities with mixing dampers set first for cooling, then heating, then modulating.

N. For variable air volume system powered units set volume controller to air flow setting indicated.

Confirm connections properly made and confirm proper operation for automatic variable air volume temperature control.

END OF SECTION 23 05 93
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Duct Insulation 23 07 13 - 1
SECTION 23 07 13

DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. INDOOR - Duct insulation
B. OUTDOOR - JACKETS
C. INDOOR & OUTDOOR - Duct liner

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. PRODUCT OVERVIEW: Provide insulation table/schedule format for all system types matching drawing M0.20 insulation table/schedule & 2019 CEC T24 Requirements B. PRODUCT DATA: Provide proposed manufactuer insulation cut sheets clearly identifying thicknesses, R Values, material and thermal characteristics.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section with with a minimum of [ten] years of documented experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with a minimum of [ten] years of documented experience.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.

B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping on an elevated skid from floor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, UL 723, ASTM E84, or UL 723.

2.02 INDOOR & OUTDOOR - DUCT LINER
A. Duct liner shall be per drawing insulation schedule, and as indicated per plans.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Ductmate Industies, Inc. PolyArmor Polyester - Basis of Design

2. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufinsulation.com.

3. Johns Manville: www.jm.com/#sle.

4. CertainTeed Corporation; ______: www.certainteed.com/#sle.

C. Polyester: Hypoallergenic polyester material webbed into a thermal blanket, which is then bonded with a FSK facing to resist damage during system installation and operation.

D. Insulation: Non-corrosive, incombustible polyester fiber complying with ASTM C1071 and ASTM E84; webbed into a thermal blanket which is then bonded with a FSK Facing.

1. Fungal Resistance: No growth when tested according to ASTM G21.

2. Thermal Resistance at 75 degrees F per ASTM C518:
a. 1-inch Thickness: R-4.2
b. 1-1/2 inch Thickness: R-6
c. 2-inch Thickness: R-8

3. Service Temperature: Up to 250 degrees F.

4. Rated Velocity on Coated Air Side for Air Erosion: 2000 fpm, minimum.

5. Minimum Noise Reduction Coefficients:
a. 1 inch Thickness: 0.65.
b. 1-1/2 inches Thickness: 0.65.
c. 2 inch Thickness: 0.65.

F. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad with integral head.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.

C. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature:

1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.

2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.

3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.

4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints.

D. Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature:

1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket.

2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation.

E. Ducts Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (below 10 feet above finished floor): Finish with aluminum jacket.

F. Exterior Applications: Provide insulation with vapor barrier jacket. Cover with weather resistant aluminum jacket.

G. External Duct Insulation Application:

1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket.

2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires.

3. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift duct off trapeze hangers and insert spacers.

4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.

5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping.

H. Duct and Plenum Liner Application:

1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 90 percent coverage.

2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA (DCS) for spacing.

3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.

4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.

5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness.

3.03 SCHEDULES
A. Refer to Drawings for Duct Insulation Schedule.

END OF SECTION 23 07 13
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
HVAC Piping Insulation 23 07 19 - 1
SECTION 23 07 19

HVAC PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping insulation.

B. Jackets and accessories.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. PRODUCT OVERVIEW: Provide insulation table/schedule format for all system types matching insulation drawing schedule & 2022 CEC T24 Table 120.3-A Pipe Insuation Thickness Requirements
B. PRODUCT DATA: Provide proposed manufactuer insulation cut sheets clearly identifying thicknesses, R Values, material and thermal characteristics.

C. MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with a minimum of [ten] years of documented experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with a a minimum of [ten] years of documented experience.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.

B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping on an elevated skid from floor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, UL 723, ASTM E84, or UL 723.

2.02 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION
A. Manufacturer:

1. Aeroflex USA, Inc; Aerocel: www.aeroflexusa.com/#sle.

2. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex: www.armacell.us/#sle.

3. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tub 180.

4. Approved Equal
B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534/C534M Grade 1; use molded tubular material wherever possible.

1. Minimum Service Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F.

2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F.

3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.

2.03 JACKETS
A. PVC Plastic: For Indoor Mechanical Rooms Only.

1. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F.
b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.
c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D1784 & ASTM E96/E96M.
d. Thickness: 30 mils.
e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.

2. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.

1. Material: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet, stucco embossed.

2. Thickness: 0.024 inch thick sheet.

3. Finish: Embossed.

4. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.

5. Fittings: 0.024 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.

6. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.

C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature; insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints.

E. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.

F. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions at equipment.

G. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07 84 00.

H. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet above finished floor): Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.

I. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping.

3.02 SCHEDULE
A. Refer to Drawings for HVAC Piping Insulation Schedule B. Refrigerant Systems:

1. Insulate all refrigerant system suction, liquid, hot-gas and discharge piping per insualtion schedule, code requirements, and equipment manufacturer recommendations.

2. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation, minimum 2.0 inch thick.

END OF SECTION 23 07 19
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC 23 09 23 - 1
SECTION 23 09 23

DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. System description.

B. Operator interface.

C. Controllers.

D. Power supplies and line filtering.

E. System software.

F. Controller software.

G. HVAC control programs.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASHRAE Std 135 - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks; 2020, with Errata (2023).

B. MIL-STD-810 - Environmental Engineering Considerations and Laboratory Tests; 2019h.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

D. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data for each system component and software module.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations, and trunk data conductors.

2. List connected data points, including connected control unit and input device.

3. Indicate system graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, and operator notations. Provide demonstration digital media containing graphics.

4. Show system configuration with peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams, modems, and interconnections.

5. Indicate description and sequence of operation of operating, user, and application software.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate manufacturer's installation instructions for all manufactured components.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including control units, thermostats, and sensors.

1. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences.

2. Include submittals data in final "Record Documents" form.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Include interconnection wiring diagrams complete field installed systems with identified and numbered, system components and devices.

2. Include keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function.

3. Include inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances.

F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner s name and registered with manufacturer.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC 23 09 23 - 2
A. Perform work in accordance with NFPA 70.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with minimum three years of documented experience.

D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL (DIR) as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.

1.06 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements.

B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Substantial Completion.

C. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty for field programmable micro-processor based units.

1.07 PROTECTION OF SOFTWARE RIGHTS
A. Prior to delivery of software, the Owner and the party providing the software will enter into a software license agreement with provisions for the following:

1. Limiting use of software to equipment provided under these specifications.

2. Limiting copying.

3. Preserving confidentiality.

4. Prohibiting transfer to a third party.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Johnson Controls, Inc
B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Automatic temperature control field monitoring and control system using field programmable micro-processor based units.

B. Base system on distributed system of fully intelligent, stand-alone controllers, operating in a multi-tasking, multi-user environment on token passing network, with central and remote hardware, software, and interconnecting wire and conduit.

C. Include computer software and hardware, operator input/output devices, control units, local area networks (LAN), sensors, control devices, actuators.

D. Controls for variable air volume terminals, radiation, reheat coils, unit heaters, fan coils, and the like when directly connected to the control units. Individual terminal unit control is specified in Section 23 09 13.

E. Provide control systems consisting of thermostats, control valves, dampers and operators, indicating devices, interface equipment and other apparatus and accessories required to operate mechanical systems, and to perform functions specified.

F. Include installation and calibration, supervision, adjustments, and fine tuning necessary for complete and fully operational system.

2.03 OPERATOR INTERFACE
A. PC Based Work Station:

B. Workstation, controllers, and control backbone to communicate using BACnet protocol and addressing.

C. BACnet protocol to comply with ASHRAE Std 135.

D. Hardware:

1. Desktop:
a. Computer(s) and display(s) to be provided by DDC controls manufacturer. b. Quantity: As indicated on the drawings.
c. Location(s): As indicated on the drawings.
d. Network Connection:
1) Ethernet interface card.

2. Laptop:

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC 23 09 23 - 3
a. Laptop(s) to be provided by DDC controls manufacturer. b. Quantity: As indicated on the drawings.
c. Network Connection:
1) Ethernet interface card.

2.04 CONTROLLERS
A. Building Controllers:

1. General:
a. Manage global strategies by one or more, independent, standalone, microprocessor based controllers.
b. Provide sufficient memory to support controller's operating system, database, and programming requirements.
c. Share data between networked controllers.
d. Controller operating system manages input and output communication signals allowing distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allowing for central monitoring and alarms.
e. Utilize real-time clock for scheduling.
f. Continuously check processor status and memory circuits for abnormal operation. g. Controller to assume predetermined failure mode and generate alarm notification upon detection of abnormal operation.
h. Communication with other network devices to be based on assigned protocol.

2. Communication:
a. Controller to reside on a BACnet network using ISO 8802-3 (ETHERNET) Data Link/Physical layer protocol.
b. Perform routing when connected to a network of custom application and application specific controllers.
c. Provide service communication port for connection to a portable operator's terminal or hand held device with compatible protocol.

3. Anticipated Environmental Ambient Conditions:
a. Outdoors and/or in Wet Ambient Conditions:
1) Mount within waterproof enclosures.
2) Rated for operation at 40 to 150 degrees F.
b. Conditioned Space:
1) Mount within dustproof enclosures.
2) Rated for operation at 32 to 120 degrees F.

4. Provisions for Serviceability:
a. Diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. b. Make all wiring connections to field removable, modular terminal strips, or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable.

5. Memory: In the event of a power loss, maintain all BIOS and programming information for a minimum of 72 hours.

6. Power and Noise Immunity:
a. Maintain operation at 90 to 110 percent of nominal voltage rating. b. Perform orderly shutdown below 80 percent of nominal voltage. c. Operation protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W. at 3 feet.

B. Custom Application Controller:

1. General:
a. Provide sufficient memory to support controller's operating system, database, and programming requirements.
b. Share data between networked, microprocessor based controllers. c. Controller operating system manages input and output communication signals allowing distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allowing for central monitoring and alarms.
d. Utilize real-time clock for scheduling.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC 23 09 23 - 4
e. Continuously check processor status and memory circuits for abnormal operation. f. Controller to assume predetermined failure mode and generate alarm notification upon detection of abnormal operation.
g. Communication with other network devices to be based on assigned protocol.

2. Communication:
a. Controller to reside on a BACnet network using MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.
b. Provide service communication port for connection to a portable operator's terminal or hand held device with compatible protocol.

4. Provisions for Serviceability:
a. Diagnostic LED's for power, communication, and processor. b. Make all wiring connections to field removable, modular terminal strips, or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable.

5. Memory: In the event of a power loss, maintain all BIOS and programming information for a minimum of 72 hours.

C. Application Specific Controllers:

1. General:
a. Not fully user programmable, microprocessor based controllers dedicated to control specific equipment.
b. Customized for operation within the confines of equipment served. c. Communication with other network devices to be based on assigned protocol.

5. Memory: In the event of a power loss, maintain all BIOS and programming information for a minimum of 72 hours.

6. Power and Noise Immunity:
a. Maintain operation at 90 to 110 percent of nominal voltage rating. b. Perform orderly shutdown below 80 percent of nominal voltage.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC 23 09 23 - 5
c. Operation protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 3 feet.

D. Input/Output Interface:

1. Hardwired inputs and outputs tie into the DDC system through building, custom application, or application specific controllers.

2. All Input/Output Points:
a. Protect controller from damage resulting from any point short-circuiting or grounding and from voltage up to 24 volts of any duration.
b. Provide universal type for building and custom application controllers where input or output is software designated as either binary or analog type with appropriate properties.

3. Binary Inputs:
a. Allow monitoring of On/Off signals from remote devices. b. Provide wetting current of 12 mA minimum, compatible with commonly available control devices and protected against the effects of contact bounce and noise. c. Sense dry contact closure with power provided only by the controller.

4. Pulse Accumulation Input Objects: Comply with all requirements of binary input objects and accept up to 10 pulses per second.

5. Analog Inputs:
a. Allow for monitoring of low voltage 0 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20 mA current, or resistance signals (thermistor, RTD).
b. Compatible with and field configurable to commonly available sensing devices.

6. Binary Outputs:
a. Used for On/Off operation or a pulsed low-voltage signal for pulse width modulation control.
b. Outputs provided with three position (On/Off/Auto) override switches. c. Status lights for building and custom application controllers to be selectable for normally open or normally closed operation.

7. Analog Outputs:
a. Monitoring signal provides a 0 to 10 VDC or a 4 to 20 mA output signal for end device control.
b. Provide status lights and two position (AUTO/MANUAL) switch for building and custom application controllers with manually adjustable potentiometer for manual override on building and custom application controllers. c. Drift to not exceed 0.4 percent of range per year.

8. Tri State Outputs:
a. Coordinate two binary outputs to control three point, floating type, electronic actuators without feedback.
b. Limit the use of three point, floating devices to the following zone and terminal unit control applications:
c. Control algorithms run the zone actuator to one end of its stroke once every 24 hours for verification of operator tracking.

9. System Object Capacity:
a. System size to be expandable to twice the number of input output objects required by providing additional controllers, including associated devices and wiring. b. Hardware additions or software revisions for the installed operator interfaces are not to be required for future, system expansions.

2.05 POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING
A. Power Supplies:

1. Provide UL listed control transformers with Class 2 current limiting type or over-current protection in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service as required by the NEC.

2. Limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity.

3. Match DC power supply to current output and voltage requirements.

4. Unit to be full wave rectifier type with output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak.

5. Regulation to be 1 percent combined line and load with 100 microsecond response time for 50 percent load changes.

6. Provide over-voltage and over-current protection to withstand a 150 percent current overload for 3 seconds minimum without trip-out or failure.

7. Operational Ambient Conditions: 32 to 120 degrees F.

8. EM/RF meets FCC Class B and VDE 0871 for Class B and MIL-STD-810 for shock and vibration.

9. Line voltage units UL recognized and CSA approved.

B. Power Line Filtering:

1. Provide external or internal transient voltage and surge suppression component for all workstations and controllers.

2. Minimum surge protection attributes:
a. Dielectric strength of 1000 volts minimum.
b. Response time of 10 nanoseconds or less.
c. Transverse mode noise attenuation of 65 dB or greater. d. Common mode noise attenuation of 150 dB or greater at 40 to 100 Hz.

2.06 LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN)
A. Provide communication between control units over local area network (LAN).

B. LAN Capacity: Not less than 60 stations or nodes.

C. Break in Communication Path: Alarm and automatically initiate LAN reconfiguration.

D. LAN Data Speed: Minimum 19.2 Kb.

E. Communication Techniques: Allow interface into network by multiple operation stations and by auto-answer/auto-dial modems. Support communication over telephone lines utilizing modems.

F. Transmission Median: Fiber optic or single pair of solid 24 gauge twisted, shielded copper cable.

G. Network Support: Time for global point to be received by any station, shall be less than 3 seconds. Provide automatic reconfiguration if any station is added or lost. If transmission cable is cut, reconfigure two sections with no disruption to system's operation, without operator intervention.

2.07 SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A. Operating System:

1. Concurrent, multi-tasking capability.

2. System Graphics:
a. Allow up to 10 graphic screens, simultaneously displayed for comparison and monitoring of system status.
b. Animation displayed by shifting image files based on object status. c. Provide method for operator with password to perform the following:
1) Move between, change size, and change location of graphic displays. 2) Modify on-line.
3) Add, delete, or change dynamic objects consisting of:
(a) Analog and binary values.
(b) Dynamic text.
(c) Static text.
(d) Animation files.

3. Custom Graphics Generation Package:
a. Create, modify, and save graphic files and visio format graphics in PCX formats. b. HTML graphics to support web browser compatible formats. c. Capture or convert graphics from Designer.

B. Workstation System Applications:

1. Automatic System Database Save and Restore Functions:
a. Current database copy of each Building Controller is automatically stored on hard disk.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC 23 09 23 - 7
b. Automatic update occurs upon change in any system panel. c. In the event of database loss in any system panel, the first workstation to detect the loss automatically restores the database for that panel unless disabled by the operator.

2. Manual System Database Save and Restore Functions by Operator with Password Clearance:
a. Save database from any system panel.
b. Clear a panel database.
c. Initiate a download of a specified database to any system panel.

3. Software provided allows system configuration and future changes or additions by operators under proper password protection.

4. On-line Help:
a. Context-sensitive system assists operator in operation and editing. b. Available for all applications.
c. Relevant screen data provided for particular screen display. d. Additional help available via hypertext.

5. Security:
a. Operator log-on requires user name and password to view, edit, add, or delete data. b. System security selectable for each operator.
c. System supervisor sets passwords and security levels for all other operators. d. Operator passwords to restrict functions accessible to viewing and/or changing system applications, editor, and object.
e. Automatic, operator log-off results from keyboard or mouse inactivity during user- adjustable, time period.
f. All system security data stored in encrypted format.

6. System Diagnostics:
a. Operations Automatically Monitored:
1) Workstations.
2) Printers.
3) Modems.
4) Network connections.
5) Building management panels.
6) Controllers.
b. Device failure is annunciated to the operator.

7. Alarm Processing:
a. All system objects are configurable to "alarm in" and "alarm out" of normal state. b. Configurable Objects:
1) Alarm limits.
2) Alarm limit differentials.
3) States.
4) Reactions for each object.

8. Alarm Messages:
a. Descriptor: English language.
b. Recognizable Features:
1) Source.
2) Location.
3) Nature.

9. Configurable Alarm Reactions by Workstation and Time of Day:
a. Logging.
b. Printing.
c. Starting programs.
d. Displaying messages.
e. Dialing out to remote locations.
f. Paging.
g. Providing audible annunciation.

10. Custom Trend Logs:
a. Definable for any data object in the system including interval, start time, and stop time.
b. Trend Data:
1) Sampled and stored on the building controller panel. 2) Archivable on hard disk.
3) Retrievable for use in reports, spreadsheets and standard database programs. 4) Archival on LAN accessible storage media including hard disk, tape, Raid array drive, and virtual cloud environment.
5) Protected and encrypted format to prevent manipulation, or editing of historical data and event logs.

11. Alarm and Event Log:
a. View all system alarms and change of states from any system location. b. Events listed chronologically.
c. Operator with proper security acknowledges and clears alarms. d. Alarms not cleared by operator are archived to the workstation hard disk.

12. Object, Property Status and Control:
a. Provide a method to view, edit if applicable, the status of any object and property in the system.
b. Status Available by the Following Methods:
1) Menu.
2) Graphics.
3) Custom Programs.

13. Reports and Logs:
a. Reporting Package:
1) Allows operator to select, modify, or create reports. 2) Definable as to data content, format, interval, and date. 3) Archivable to hard disk.
b. Real-time logs available by type or status such as alarm, lockout, normal, etc. c. Stored on hard disk and readily accessible by standard software applications, including spreadsheets and word processing.
d. Set to be printed on operator command or specific time(s).

14. Reports:
a. Standard:
1) Objects with current values.
2) Current alarms not locked out.
3) Disabled and overridden objects, points and SNVTs.
4) Objects in manual or automatic alarm lockout.
5) Objects in alarm lockout currently in alarm.
6) Logs:
(a) Alarm History.
(b) System messages.
(c) System events.
(d) Trends.
b. Custom:
1) Daily.
2) Weekly.
3) Monthly.
4) Annual.
5) Time and date stamped.
6) Title.
7) Facility name.
c. Tenant Override:

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC 23 09 23 - 9
1) Monthly report showing total, requested, after-hours HVAC and lighting services on a daily basis for each tenant.
2) Annual report showing override usage on a monthly basis. d. Electrical, Fuel, and Weather:
1) Electrical Meter(s):
(a) Monthly showing daily electrical consumption and peak electrical demand with time and date stamp for each meter.
(b) Annual summary showing monthly electrical consumption and peak demand with time and date stamp for each meter.
2) Fuel Meter(s):
(a) Monthly showing daily natural gas consumption for each meter. (b) Annual summary showing monthly consumption for each meter. 3) Weather:
(a) Monthly showing minimum, maximum, average outdoor air temperature and heating/cooling degree-days for the month.

C. Workstation Applications Editors:

1. Provide editing software for each system application at PC workstation.

2. Downloaded application is executed at controller panel.

3. Full screen editor for each application allows operator to view and change:
a. Configuration.
b. Name.
c. Control parameters.
d. Set-points.

4. Scheduling:
a. Monthly calendar indicates schedules, holidays, and exceptions. b. Allows several related objects to be scheduled and copied to other objects or dates. c. Start and stop times adjustable from master schedule.

5. Custom Application Programming:
a. Create, modify, debug, edit, compile, and download custom application programming during operation and without disruption of all other system applications. b. Programming Features:
1) English oriented language, based on BASIC, FORTRAN, C, or PASCAL syntax allowing for free form programming.
2) Alternative language graphically based using appropriate function blocks suitable for all required functions and amenable to customizing or compounding. 3) Insert, add, modify, and delete custom programming code that incorporates word processing features such as cut/paste and find/replace. 4) Allows the development of independently, executing, program modules designed to enable and disable other modules.
5) Debugging/simulation capability that displays intermediate values and/or results including syntax/execution error messages.
6) Support for conditional statements (IF/THEN/ELSE/ELSE-F) using compound Boolean (AND, OR, and NOT) and/or relations (EQUAL, LESS THAN, GREATER THAN, NOT EQUAL) comparisons.
7) Support for floating-point arithmetic utilizing plus, minus, divide, times, square root operators; including absolute value; minimum/maximum value from a list of values for mathematical functions.
8) Language consisting of resettable, predefined, variables representing time of day, day of the week, month of the year, date; and elapsed time in seconds, minutes, hours, and days where the variable values cab be used in IF/THEN comparisons, calculations, programming statement logic, etc. 9) Language having predefined variables representing status and results of the system software enables, disables, and changes the set points of the controller software.

2.08 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE
A. All applications reside and operate in the system controllers and editing of all applications occurs at the operator workstation.

B. System Security:

1. User access secured via user passwords and user names.

2. Passwords restrict user to the objects, applications, and system functions as assigned by the system manager.

3. User Log On/Log Off attempts are recorded.

4. Automatic Log Off occurs following the last keystroke after a user defined delay time.

C. Object or Object Group Scheduling:

1. Weekly Schedules Based on Separate, Daily Schedules:
a. Include start, stop, optimal stop, and night economizer. b. 10 events maximum per schedule.
c. Start/stop times adjustable for each group object.

2. Exception Schedules:
a. Based on any day of the year.
b. Defined up to one year in advance.
c. Automatically discarded and replaced with standard schedule for that day of the week upon execution.

3. Holiday or Special Schedules:
a. Capability to define up to 99 schedules.
b. Repeated annually.
c. Length of each period is operator defined.

D. Provide standard application for equipment coordination and grouping based on function and location to be used for scheduling and other applications.

E. Alarms:

1. Binary object is set to alarm based on the operator specified state.

2. Analog object to have high/low alarm limits.

3. All alarming is capable of being automatically and manually disabled.

4. Alarm Reporting:
a. Operator determines action to be taken for alarm event. b. Alarms to be routed to appropriate workstation.
c. Reporting Options:
1) Start programs.
2) Logged.
3) Custom messaging.
4) Graphical displays.
5) Dial out to workstation receivers via system protocol.

F. Demand Limiting:

1. Building power consumption monitored from signals generated by a pulse generator, mounted at the building power meter.

2. Demand limit controlled via load shedding or load restoration in a predetermined and predictive manner.

3. Demand Reduction Methods:
a. Supply air temperature reset.
b. Space temperature set-point reset.
c. Equipment off/on prioritization.

4. Relevant variables that influence demand limiting control are based on the power company methodology for computing demand charges.

5. Operator On-Line Changes Allowed:
a. Addition and deletion of loads controlled.
b. Changes in demand intervals.
c. Changes in demand limit for meter(s).

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC 23 09 23 - 11
d. Maximum equipment shutoff time.
e. Minimum equipment shutoff time.
f. Select rotational or sequential shedding and restoring. g. Shed/restore priority.

6. Information and Reports available Hourly, Daily, and Monthly:
a. Total electric consumption.
b. Peak demand.
c. Date and time of peak demand.
d. Daily peak demand.

G. Maintenance Management: System monitors equipment status and generates maintenance messages based upon user-designated run-time limits.

H. Sequencing: Application software based upon specified sequences of operation in Section 23 09 93.

I. PID Control Characteristics:

1. Direct or reverse action.

2. Anti-windup.

3. Calculated, time-varying, analog value, positions an output or stages a series of outputs.

4. User selectable controlled variable, set-point, and PED gains.

J. Staggered Start Application:

1. Prevents all controlled equipment from simultaneously restarting after power outage.

2. Order of equipment startup is user selectable.

K. Energy Calculations:

1. Accumulated instantaneous power or flow rates are converted to energy use data.

2. Algorithm calculates a rolling average and allows window of time to be user specified in minute intervals.

3. Algorithm calculates a fixed window average with a digital input signal from a utility meter defining the start of the window period that in turn synchronizes the fixed-window average with that used by the power company.

L. Anti-Short Cycling:

1. All binary output objects protected from short-cycling.

2. Allows minimum on-time and off-time to be selected.

M. On-Off Control with Differential:

1. Algorithm allows binary output to be cycled based on a controlled variable and set-point.

2. Algorithm to be direct-acting or reverse-acting incorporating an adjustable differential.

N. Run-Time Totalization:

1. Totalize run-times for all binary input objects.

2. Provides operator with capability to assign high run-time alarm.

2.09 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS:

A. As Indicated on Drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to the control units and to the operator work station. Verify that field end devices, wiring, and pneumatic tubing is installed prior to installation proceeding.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install control units and other hardware in position on permanent walls where not subject to excessive vibration.

B. Install software in control units and in operator work station. Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and appropriate to sequence of operation. Refer to Section 23 09 93.

C. Provide with 120v AC, 15 amp power circuit to each programmable control unit.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC 23 09 23 - 12
D. Provide conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Section 26 05 83. Electrical material and installation shall be in accordance with appropriate requirements of Division 26.

E. Install all control wiring in conduit.

1. Control wiring located within accessible ceiling plenums may be installed as plenum rated cable and suspended from structure with j-hooks.

3.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Start and commission systems. Allow sufficient time for start-up and commissioning prior to placing control systems in permanent operation.

B. Provide service engineer to instruct Owner's representative in operation of systems plant and equipment for 3 day period.

C. Provide basic operator training for 5 persons on data display, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data, execution of commands and request of logs. Include a minimum of 40 hours dedicated instructor time. Provide training on site.

3.04 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Demonstrate complete and operating system to Owner.

3.05 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide service and maintenance of energy management and control systems for one years from Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Provide two complete inspections, one in each season, to inspect, calibrate, and adjust controls as required, and submit written reports.

END OF SECTION 23 09 23
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Refrigerant Piping 23 23 00 - 1
SECTION 23 23 00

REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping.

B. Refrigerant.

C. Moisture and liquid indicators.

D. Valves.

E. Pressure relief valves.

F. Solenoid valves.

G. Expansion valves.

H. Flexible connections.

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.5 unless indicated otherwise.

B. Liquid Indicators:

1. Use line size liquid indicators in main liquid line leaving condenser.

2. If receiver is provided, install in liquid line leaving receiver.

3. Use line size on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.

C. Valves:

1. Use service valves on suction and discharge of compressors.

2. Use gauge taps at compressor inlet and outlet.

3. Use gauge taps at hot gas bypass regulators, inlet and outlet.

4. Use check valves on compressor discharge.

D. Refrigerant Charging (Packed Angle) Valve: Use in liquid line between receiver shut-off valve and expansion valve.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. PRODUCT DATA: Provide general assembly of specialties, including manufacturers catalogue information. Provide manufacturers product data for all piping materials and accessories.

B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit SCALED SHOP drawing indicating overall pipe routing, fittings, gages, sizes, elevations, welds, and configuration PRIOR to release of fabrication for all piping systems.

C. TEST REPORTS: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure, and leakage rate in accordance with 230593 Testing & Balancing & 232300 Section 3 Execution section below.

D. Submit welders certification of compliance with ASME BPVC-IX.

E. AS BUILTS: Provide electronic PDF scaled record as built drawings of exact locations of all ductwork & associated equipment for owners records. As builts shall include all contract document changes.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum TEN years of documented experience, and approved by manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section, with minimum TEN years of documented experience.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place.

B. Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end caps and plugs in place until installation.

C. Dehydrate and charge components such as piping and receivers, seal prior to shipment, until connected into system.

2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

2.02 PIPING
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B280, H58 hard drawn or O60 soft annealed.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper.

2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8M/A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy.

B. Copper Tube to 7/8 inch OD: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type L (A), annealed.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.26 cast copper.

2. Joints: Flared.

C. Pipe Supports and Anchors:

1. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58. a. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations.

2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Malleable iron adjustable swivel, split ring.

3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.

6. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

7. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

8. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

9. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.

10. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.

11. Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetrating the roofing assembly, with support fixtures as specified; and as follows:
a. Bases: High density, UV tolerant, polypropylene or reinforced PVC. b. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing assembly.
c. Steel Components: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.
d. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as indicated for equivalent indoor hangers and supports; corrosion resistant material. e. Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches under pipe to top of roofing.

2.03 MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS
A. Indicators: Single port type, UL listed, with copper or brass body, flared or solder ends, sight glass, color coded paper moisture indicator with removable element cartridge and plastic cap; for maximum temperature of 200 degrees F and maximum working pressure of 500 psi.

2.04 VALVES
A. Packed Angle Valves:

1. Forged brass or nickel plated forged steel, forged brass seal caps with copper gasket, rising stem and seat with backseating, molded stem packing, solder or flared ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 275 degrees F.

B. Ball Valves:

1. Two piece bolted forged brass body with teflon ball seals and copper tube extensions, brass bonnet and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene ring stem seals; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 300 degrees F.

2.05 PRESSURE REGULATORS
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Refrigerant Piping 23 23 00 - 3
A. Brass body, stainless steel diaphragm, direct acting, adjustable over 0 to 80 psi range, for maximum working pressure of 450 psi.

2.06 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
A. Straight Through or Angle Type: Brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed and stamped with ASME UV and National Board Certification NB, selected to ASHRAE Std 15, with standard setting of 235 psi.

2.07 SOLENOID VALVES
A. Valve: AHRI 760 I-P, pilot operated, copper, brass or steel body and internal parts, synthetic seat, stainless steel stem and plunger assembly (permitting manual operation in case of coil failure), integral strainer, with flared, solder, or threaded ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi.

B. Coil Assembly: UL 429 UL listed, replaceable with molded electromagnetic coil, moisture and fungus proof, with surge protector and color coded lead wires, integral junction box with pilot light.

2.08 EXPANSION VALVES
A. Angle or Straight Through Type: AHRI 750; design suitable for refrigerant, brass body, internal or external equalizer, bleed hole, adjustable superheat setting, replaceable inlet strainer, with non-replaceable capillary tube and remote sensing bulb and remote bulb well.

B. Selection: Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine available pressure drop across valve. Select valve for maximum load at design operating pressure and minimum 10 degrees F superheat. Select to avoid being undersized at full load and excessively oversized at part load.

2.09 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVES
A. Valve:

1. Brass body with flared or solder connection, needle valve with floating needle and machined seat, stepper motor drive.

2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Corrugated stainless steel hose with single layer of stainless steel exterior braiding, minimum 9 inches long with copper tube ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Route piping in orderly manner, with piping system parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.

C. Install piping to conserve building space and avoid interference with use of space.

D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope piping one percent in direction of oil return.

E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

F. Inserts:

1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.

2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.

3. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.

G. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.5.

2. Support horizontal piping as indicated.

3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.

4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

5. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

6. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers.

7. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

H. Arrange piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and provide double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of flow.

I. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

J. Provide access to concealed valves and fittings. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 08 3100.

K. Flood piping system with nitrogen when brazing.

L. Insulate piping per Specification Section 230719.

M. Follow manufactuer's requirements for testing of refrigerant systems for pressure & final vacuum limits prior to final charge of system. Minimum line test pressure performance requirements are:

1. Suction lines for heat pump applications - 550 PSIG

2. Hot Gas & Liquid Lines - 550 PSIG

3.
N. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.

3.03 SCHEDULES
A. Hanger Spacing for Copper Tubing.

1. 1/2 inch, 5/8 inch, and 7/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

2. 1-1/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

3. 1-3/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

4. 1-5/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

END OF SECTION 23 23 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
HVAC Ducts and Casings 23 31 00 - 1
SECTION 23 31 00

HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal ductwork.

B. Casing and plenums.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASHRAE (FUND) - ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals; Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard.

B. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2023.

C. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2024.

D. SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2012, 2nd Edition.

E. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2020.

F. SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual; 2012.

G. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. PRODUCT DATA: Provide data for duct materials.

B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit SCALED SHOP drawing indicating overall ductwork routing, fittings, gages, sizes, elevations, welds, and configuration PRIOR to release of fabrication for all ductwork systems.

C. TEST REPORTS: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure, and leakage rate in accordance with 230593 Testing & Balancing.

D. AS BUILTS: Provide electronic PDF scaled record as built drawings of exact locations of all ductwork & associated equipment for owners records. As builts shall include all contract document changes including RFC/RFIs, CCDs, and all post bid contract drawing changes.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section, with minimum TEN years of documented experience.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers.

B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants.

C. Protect inner ductwork from weather and construction traffic, dirt, or water by wrapping all ductwork ends with temporary protective polyethylene blue film, LLDPE 3 millimeters thick or similar. Remove temporary film at ends only when ductwork system installed in overhead, and connected to other fittings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DUCT ASSEMBLIES
A. Regulatory Requirements: Construct ductwork to comply with SMACNA DCS.

B. Ducts: Galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated here within or on contract drawings.

C. Low Pressure Supply: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.

D. Medium and High Pressure Supply: 2 in w.g. pressure class or as per drawing schedule, galvanized steel. More stringent value shall apply.

E. Specialty Exhaust: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, 316 ss.

1. Construct of 20 gage, 0.0375 inch stainless steel.

2. Construction:
a. Liquid tight with continuous external weld for all seams and joints. b. Pitch ductwork back towards kitchen hood, 1/4" per foot slope

3. Access Doors:
a. Provide for duct cleaning inside horizontal duct at drain pockets, every 20 feet and at each change of direction. See plans for additional access door requirements. b. Use same material and thickness as duct with gaskets and sealants rated 1500 degrees F for grease tight construction.

4. Drains
a. Provide grease drains & traps at bottom of vertical risers should offset occur with provisions for clean out.

F. Chemical Storage Exhaust: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, CPVC.

2.02 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M FS Type B, with G60/Z180 coating.

B. Stainless Steel for Ducts: ASTM A666, Type 304.

C. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant.

1. CONCEALED DUCTWORK:
a. Provide heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration and compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class of ducts.

2. EXPOSED DUCTWORK:
a. All fittings sealed from inside
b. Provide painters tape each end to seal
c. Use clear silicone, similar to Loctite Translucent

3. VOC Content: Not more than 250 g/L, excluding water.

4. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of zero and smoke developed index of zero, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

D. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded.

E. Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:

1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.

2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.

3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.

4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.

5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308.

6. Other Types: As required.

2.03 DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.

B. PAINTING: When painting exposed ductwork, contractor to request ductwork have galvannealed/paintlock from fabricator.

C. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.

D. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide air foil turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.

E. Provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation when acoustical lining is indicated.

F. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
HVAC Ducts and Casings 23 31 00 - 3
G. Where ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver frame, provide blank-out panels sealing louver area around duct. Use same material as duct, painted black on exterior side; seal to louver frame and duct.

2.04 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS
A. DOUBLE WALL INSULATED RECTANGULAR DUCTS: Rectangular duct with galvanized steel outer wall, perforated galvanized steel inner wall; fitting with solid inner wall and 2 inch linning minimum R value of R=8.0 per ASHRAE 90.1 Table 6-B. Top of duct shall have hat channel to pitch water to sides of duct.

1. Manufacturing shall occur by 3rd party manufacturing facility

2. Fittings: Manufacture at least two gages heavier metal than duct.

B. FLAT OVAL & SPIRAL ROUND DUCTWORK: Spiral lockseam duct with galvanized steel outer wall.

1. Fittings: Manufacture at least two gages heavier metal than duct.

2. EXPOSED DUCTWORK
a. Ductwork that will be painted, provide galvannealed/paintlock from fabricator b. All fittings sealed from inside
c. Provide painters tape each end to seal
d. Use clear silicone, similar to Loctite Translucent

3. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).

C. FLEXIBLE DUCTS: Two ply vinyl, polyethlyene, or nylon film supported by helically wound spring steel wire.

1. Insulation: Fiberglass insulation with aluminized vapor barrier film.

2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 2" WG positive and 0.5" WG negative.

3. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.

4. Temperature Range: Minus 10 degrees F to 160 degrees F.

5. Manufacturers:
a. Casco, Silentflex II.
b. Flexmaster, Type 1M or Type 6M.
c. Substitutions: As Approved
D. ACOUSTICAL FLEXIBLE DUCTS: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helically wound spring steel wire.

1. Insulation: Fiberglass insulation with reinforced vapor barrier.

2. Inner Core: Spun-bonded, non-woven inner core.

3. Pressure Rating: 6 inches positive and 1.0 inches WG negative.

4. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.

5. Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees F to 210 degrees F.

6. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Flexmaster USA Type 6M
b. Thermaflex MKE
c. JPL AMR-25
d. Quiteflex QAS
E. Transverse Duct Connection System: SMACNA "E" rated rigidly class connection, interlocking angle and duct edge connection system with sealant, gasket, cleats, and corner clips in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).

2.05 CASINGS
A. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and construct for operating pressures indicated.

B. Mount floor mounted casings on 4 inch high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet panels on 8 inch centers to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, provide liner of galvanized 18 gage,

0.0478 inch expanded metal mesh supported at 12 inch centers, turned up 12 inches at sides with sheet metal shields.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
HVAC Ducts and Casings 23 31 00 - 4
C. Reinforce door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum supporting angles. Install hinged access doors where indicated or required for access to equipment for cleaning and inspection.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. TEMPORARY PROTECTION: During construction protect inner ductwork from weather and construction traffic, dirt, or water by wrapping all ductwork ends with temporary protective polyethylene blue film, LLDPE 3 millimeters thick or similar. Remove temporary film at ends only when ductwork system installed in overhead, and connected to other fittings.

D. Exposed, Painted Ductwork: Prior to painting prepare ductwork surface by cleaning with water- based detergent to remove residual dirt and lubricating oils and wipe dry with lint free cloth.

E. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.

F. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers.

Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.

G. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities.

H. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

I. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with one foot maximum length of flexible duct.

Do not use flexible duct to change direction.

J. At exterior wall louvers, seal duct to louver frame and install blank-out panels.

3.02 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTING
A. Testing shall be in accordance with Specification 230593 Testing & Balancing B. Testing shall be performed by TAB Certified Subcontractor, per specification above.

C. Perform duct leakage testing for ALL DUCTWORK designed.

1. Representative sections totaling not less than 10% of the total installed duct area for the designated pressure class shall be tested

2. Positive pressure testing is acceptable for negative pressure ductwork.

END OF SECTION 23 31 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Air Duct Accessories 23 33 00 - 1
SECTION 23 33 00

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Backdraft dampers
B. Combination fire and smoke dampers.

C. Duct access doors.

D. Duct test holes.

E. Flexible duct connections.

F. Manual volume control dampers
G. Remote actuated electronic volume control dampers.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2024.

B. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems; National Fire Protection Association
C. NFPA 92 - Standard for Smoke Control Systems; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

D. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations; 2024.

E. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2020.

F. UL 33 - Safety Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

G. UL 555 - Standard for Fire Dampers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

H. UL 555S - Standard for Smoke Dampers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. PRODUCT DATA: Provide dimensions of manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. Indicate electrical service with wiring diagrams & unit connection requirements.

B. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS: Indicate assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions for all fire smoke dampers & electronic dampers as required..

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.

B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

C. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS - METAL
A. Manufacturers:

1. Pottorff

2. Greenheck

3. Nailor Industries, Inc

4. Ruskin Company
B. Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18 by 18 inches or Smaller, Furnished with Air Moving Equipment: Air moving equipment manufacturer's standard construction.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Air Duct Accessories 23 33 00 - 2
C. Multi-Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers: Galvanized steel, with center pivoted blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

2.02 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Pottorff

2. Greenheck

3. Nailor Industries Inc

4. Ruskin Company
B. Ratings:

1. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL 555, UL 555S, and as indicated.

2. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours or 3-hours in accordance with UL-555. Ratings required per wall rating shown on plans.

3. Smoke Rating: Class-2 (20 cfm/sf at 4 in wg) leakage in accordance with UL-555S

4. Air Flow Rating: 2000 fpm

5. Differential Pressure Rating: 4 in.wg.

C. Provide factory sleeve and collar for each damper.

D. Construction:

1. Frame: Hat-shaped channel, roll formed galvanized steel with interlocking gusseted corners. Structurally equivalent to 13 gauge (2.3mm) U-channel type frame. Low profile head and sill on sizes less than 13 inches (330 mm) high.

2. Blades: 6 inch maximum width x 16 gauge (152mm x 1.6mm), 3-V shape, roll formed galvanized steel.

3. Blade Seals: Silicone rubber permanently bonded to blade.

4. Jamb Seals: Stainless steel, flexible metal compression type.

5. Axels: Minimum ½” (13mm) diameter plated steel hex-shaped, mechanically attached to blade.

6. Bearings: Self-lubricating stainless steel, sleeve-type turning in extruded hole in frame.

7. Linkage: Concealed in frame.

8. Fire Closure Device: Resettable

9. Release Temperature: 165 F

10. Mounting: Vertical and/or Horizontal (1 ½ hour rated only)

11. Sleeve: Standard 16 inches long x 20 gauge (406mm x 1.0mm), factory installed.

12. Actuator: Electric 120 V, 60 Hz, two-position, fail close, external mount E. Position Indicator Switch Package: Shall connect directly to the blade axel for positive annunciation (interconnecting arms, wire-forms, or brackets shall not be accepted) and provide full open and full closed blade indication to a remote location.

F. Damper shall be controlled by area wide smoke and fire detection and alarm system.

Coordinate with Section 28 4600 Fire Detection and Alarm System

2.03 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Acudor Products Inc, a Division of Nelson Industrial Inc: www.acudor.com/#sle.

2. Ductmate Industries, Inc, a DMI Company: www.ductmate.com/#sle.

3. Lloyd Industries, Inc: www.firedamper.com/#sle.

4. Nailor Industries, Inc: www.nailor.com/#sle.

B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.

2.04 DUCT TEST HOLES
A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.

B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation.

2.05 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.

B. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.

1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd.
a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 inches wide.

2. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gage, 0.0239 inch thick galvanized steel.

C. Maximum Installed Length: 14 inch.

2.06 MANUAL VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Application: Provide Manual Volume Control Dampers for any balancing damper located in an accessible location.

B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.

C. Splitter Dampers:

1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches.

2. Blade: Fabricate of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with continuous hinge or rod.

3. Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action, flanged bushing with set screw .

D. Single Blade Dampers:

1. Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 by 30 inch.

2. Blade: 24 gage, 0.0239 inch, minimum.

E. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 by 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware.

1. Blade: 18 gage, 0.0478 inch, minimum.

F. End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon, thermoplastic elastomer, or sintered bronze bearings.

2.07 REMOTE ACTUATED ELECTRONIC VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Application: Provide battery powered, low-voltage Remote Actuated Volume Control Dampers for any balancing damper located in hard ceiling or inaccessible locations per drawing detail.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Greenheck - RBD Series

2. Young's Regulator - EBD Series

3. Metropolitan Air Technology - EB-250 Series with EB-SP8 Controller

4. Ruskin - ZPD Series
C. Description: Balancing Damper actuated by a low votage (9V or 12V) DC motor for use above hard ceilings and in other inaccessible locations. Remote controller provides power, control and damper position feedback via a cable of up to 500 feet.

D. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and as indicated.

E. Shell: Galvanized steel, 24 gage minimum.

F. Blade: Galvanized steel, 20 gage minimum.

G. Shaft: 1/2" Plated Steel
H. Bushing: Oil Impregnated Bronze
I. Controller: Hand held, battery powered controller, with position indicator.

J. Wall/Ceiling Termination: Concealed and located as indicated on Drawings. If termination is not indicated on Drawings, locate termination in concealed, accessible ceiling areas, or if not feasible, locate termination recessed in hard ceiling with escuteon plate to match ceiling color.

Termination block shall have multiple ports, collecting all dampers to respective room controller.

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA (DCS). Refer to Section 23 31 00 for duct construction and pressure class.

B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated.

C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide for cleaning kitchen exhaust ducts in accordance with NFPA 96 Provide minimum 8 by 8 inch size for hand access, size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 by 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication.

D. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.

E. Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and smoke dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.

F. Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 92.

G. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative.

H. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to the equipment.

I. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to the equipment.

J. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take-off.

K. Use splitter dampers only where indicated.

L. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly.

END OF SECTION 23 33 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
HVAC Power Ventilators 23 34 23 - 1
SECTION 23 34 23

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Roof exhausters.

B. Ceiling exhaust fans.

C. Upblast roof exhausters.

D. Utility vent set.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; 2016.

B. AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans; 2020.

C. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating; 2016.

D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2020.

E. UL 705 - Power Ventilators; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements per drawing schedules & plans.

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions.

C. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams.

D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. Extra Fan Belts: Two sets for each individual fan.

1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened containers B. Storage: Store materials in a dry area indoor, protected from damage and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions;
C. Handling: Handle and lift fans in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage.

D. Permanent ventilators may not be used for ventilation during construction.

1.05 WARRANTY
A. Provide owner with one (1) year manufacturer's warranty for all equipment compoenents including fan motor from date of owner's acceptance.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Greenheck Fan Corporation: www.greenheck.com
B. Loren Cook Company: www.lorencook.com
C. PLASTEC for specialty fans. Serving chemical rooms.

D. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 UPBLAST ROOF EXHAUSTERS
A. Performance Ratings: Refer to drawing schedules
B. Direct Drive Fan:

1. Fan Wheel:
a. Type: Non-overloading, backward inclined centrifugal. b. Wheel Material: see schedule for special equipment requirements.

2. Statically and dynamically balanced.

3. Motors:
a. Electronically Communicated Motor (ECM) Type
b. Enclosures: Open Type.
c. Heavy duty ball bearing type.
d. Controller: Shall be speed controllable down to 20% of full speed, 80% turndown.

Speed shall be controlled by either a potentiometer dial mounted at the motor or by a 0-10 VDC signal.
e. Mount on vibration isolators or resilient cradle mounts, out of air stream. f. Cover: Aluminum
g. Fully accessible for maintenance.

4. Housing:
a. Construct of heavy gage aluminum including curb cap, windband, and motor compartment.
b. Rigid internal support structure.
c. One-piece fabricated or fully welded curb-cap base to windband for leak proof construction.
d. Construct drive frame assembly of heavy gage steel, mounted on vibration isolators. e. Provide breather tube for fresh air motor cooling and wiring.

C. Disconnect Switches:

1. Factory mounted and wired.

2. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations:
a. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.

3. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Provide manufacturer's standard or factory applied gray unless otherwise indicated.

4. Positive electrical shutoff.

5. Wired from fan motor to junction box installed within motor compartment.

D. Roof Curb: 8 inch high MINIMUM self-flashing of aluminum with continuously welded seams, factory installed nailer strip. Roof curbs shall be slope compensating as required per contract drawings.

E. Drain Trough: Allows for single-point drainage of water, grease, and other residues.

F. Options/Accessories:

1. Birdscreen:
a. Provide galvanized steel construction.
b. Protects fan discharge.

2. Dampers: Provide gravity type.

3. Drain Connection:
a. Aluminum construction.
b. Allows single-point drainage of grease, water, or other residues.

4. Finishes: Hi Pro Polyester, corrosion resistant powder coating.

5. Hinge Sub-Base:
a. Aluminum hinges.
b. Hinges and restraint cables mounted to base (sleeve). c. Allows fan to tilt away for access to wheel and ductwork for inspection and cleaning.

2.03 UTILITY VENT SET
A. Performance Ratings: Refer to drawing schedules
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
HVAC Power Ventilators 23 34 23 - 3
B. Roof Curb: 8 inch high minimum; self-flashing of aluminum with continuously welded seams, built-in cant strips, insulation and curb bottom, curb bottom, ventilated double wall, and factory installed nailer strip.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Secure roof exhausters with cadmium plated steel lag screws to roof curb.

C. Extend ducts to roof exhausters into roof curb. Counterflash duct to roof opening.

D. Install backdraft dampers on inlet to roof and wall exhausters.

E. Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling exhauster fans and as indicated in drawings.

3.02 SCHEDULES
A. Refer to Drawings.

END OF SECTION 23 34 23
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Air Outlets and Inlets 23 37 00 - 1
SECTION 23 37 00

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Diffusers.

B. Registers/grilles.

C. Roof hoods.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing the Performance of Air Outlets and Air Inlets; 2023.

B. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012.

C. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2020.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum ten years ofdocumented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to Drawings for air outlet and inlet requirements.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Price Industries: https://www.priceindustries.com/
B. Krueger-HVAC, Division of Air System Components: www.krueger-hvac.com/#sle.

C. Titus, a brand of Air Distribution Technologies: www.titus-hvac.com/#sle.

D. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.03 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. Type: Provide Square Plaque Type diffuser to discharge air in four way pattern with sectorizing baffles where indicated.

B. Connections: Round.

C. Frame: Provide Lay In Type, Exact Frame style to be confirmed during submittal. D. Fabrication: Aluminum with powder coat finish. Construction shall consist of a seamless, one- piece, precision formed backpan that incorporates a round inlet collar of sufficient length for connecting rigid or flexible duct. An inner plaque assembly shall be incorporated and shall drop no more than ¼ inch below the ceiling plane to assure proper air distribution performance. The inner plaque assembly shall be completely removable from the room side to allow for full access to any dampers or other ductwork components located near the diffuser neck.

E. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

2.04 CEILING SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.

B. Construction: Made of aluminum extrusions with factory enamel finish.

C. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

D. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face.

2.05 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with single deflection blades set at 0 degrees, vertical face.

C. Fabrication: Aluminum with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frames and 22 gage, 0.0299 inch minimum blades, aluminum with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frame & aluminum extrusions, with factory baked on powder coat finish.

D. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

2.06 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with spring or other device to set blades, vertical face.

B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.

C. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish.

D. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

2.07 ROOF HOODS
A. Fabricate air inlet or exhaust hoods in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).

B. Fabricate of 304 stainless steel, minimum 16 gage, 0.0598 inch base and 20 gage, 0.0359 inch hood, or aluminum, minimum 16 gage, 0.0598 inch base and 18 gage, 0.0598 inch hood; suitably reinforced; with removable hood; birdscreen with 1/2 inch square mesh for exhaust and 3/4 inch for intake, and factory prime coat finish.

C. Make hood outlet area minimum of twice throat area.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Comply with SMACNA (ASMM) for flashing/counter-flashing of roof penetrations and supports for roof curbs and roof mounted equipment.

C. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.

D. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.

E. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.

F. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black.

3.02 AIR OUTLET AND INLET SCHEDULE
A. Refer to Drawings.

END OF SECTION 23 37 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
HVAC Air Cleaning Devices 23 40 00 - 1
SECTION 23 40 00

HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Disposable, extended area panel filters.

B. Disposable panel filters.

C. Filter gages.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASHRAE Std 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size; 2017, with Addendum (2022).

B. UL 900 - Standard for Air Filter Units; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly and filter frames, dimensions, motor locations and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Provide filter sizes & location for all equipment in table/schedule format.

C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. Filters provided for project shall include:
a. One (1) MERV 8 for commissioning/startup that shall be discarded after testing is complete & prior to owner acceptance.
b. Two (2) MERV 13/15 filters of each type and size, one set placed within units and (1) extra set for owner storage.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including filter type and size.

B. Protect filters from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping on an elevated skid from floor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FILTER MANUFACTURERS
A. American Filtration Inc: www.americanfiltration.com/#sle.

B. AAF International/American Air Filter: www.aafintl.com/#sle.

C. The Camfil Group: www.camfilfarr.com/#sle.

D. Or Equal, that meets the criteria below

2.02 DISPOSABLE PANEL FILTERS - DUCTED FCUS ONLY
A. Manufacturers: Camfil Durafil ES3 [Basis of Design]

1. Equal may be accepted pending they meet the criterial below.

2. Filter rating shall match equipment schedules
B. Media: UL 900 Class 2, high performance, compact V-Bed style air filter constructed with glass fiber media.

1. Nominal Size: 24"x24"x12", sized for 2,000 CFM Max

2. Side Access Housing: Provide return with side access filter housing, CamFil Guide Pack Housing or Equal
C. Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV): 13, tested in accordance with ASHRAE 52.2.

Filter shall NOT loose efficiency over time.

D. Perfromance Rating:

1. Face Velocity: 500 FPM (2.54 m/sec) maximum velocity

2. Initial Resistance: 0.30" inches WG

3. Final Resistance: 0.6" inches WG

2.03 DISPOSABLE PANEL FILTERS - ROOFTOP SUPPLY FANS ONLY LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
HVAC Air Cleaning Devices 23 40 00 - 2
A. Manufacturers: Camfil Opti-Pac [Basis of Design]

1. Equal may be accepted pending they meet the criterial below.

2. Filter rating shall match equipment schedules
B. Media: UL 900 Class 2, micro fine wet-laid glass mat filter media, formed into uniformly spaced mini-pleat configuration. Filter shall have thermoplastic resin separators, frame to media adhesive and high wet strength beverage board enclosing frame.

1. Nominal Depth: 4 INCH ONLY. Height and width sized based on unit configuration/array
C. Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV): 13, tested in accordance with ASHRAE 52.2.

Filter shall NOT loose efficiency over time.

D. Performance Rating:

1. Face Velocity: 500 FPM maximum velocity

2. Initial Resistance: 0.50" inches WG

3. Final Resistance: 1.0" inches WG

2.04 FILTER GAGES
A. Manufacturers:

1. Dwyer Instruments, Inc: www.dwyer-inst.com/#sle.

2. Weiss Instruments: www.weissinstruments.com/#sle.

3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Direct Reading Dial: 3-1/2 inch diameter diaphragm actuated dial in metal case, vent valves, black figures on white background, front recalibration adjustment, range 0-0.5 inch WG, 2 percent of full scale accuracy.

C. Accessories: Static pressure tips with integral compression fittings, 1/4 inch aluminum tubing, 2-way or 3-way vent valves.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install air cleaning devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with felt, rubber, or neoprene gaskets.

C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing, with clean set.

D. Provide filter gages on filter banks, installed with separate static pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters.

3.02 SCHEDULES:

A. Refer to Drawings.

END OF SECTION 23 40 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Variable Refrigerant Flow HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 1
SECTION 23 81 29

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Air-source outdoor units.

B. Refrigerant piping.

C. Indoor units.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASHRAE Std 135 - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks; 2020, with Errata and Amendments (2022).

B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2020.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 01 for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard data sheets showing the following for each item of equipment, marked to correlate to equipment item markings indicated in Contract Documents:

C. Shop Drawings: Installation drawings custom-made for this project; include as-designed HVAC layouts, locations of equipment items, refrigerant piping sizes and locations, condensate piping sizes and locations, remote sensing devices, control components, electrical connections, control wiring connections. Include:

1. Detailed piping diagrams, with branch balancing devices.

2. Condensate piping routing, size, and pump connections.

3. Detailed power wiring diagrams.

4. Detailed control wiring diagrams.

5. Locations of required access through fixed construction.

6. Drawings required by manufacturer.

D. Operating and Maintenance Data:

1. Manufacturer's complete standard instructions for each unit of equipment and control panel.

2. Custom-prepared system operation, troubleshooting, and maintenance instructions and recommendations.

3. Identification of replaceable parts and local source of supply.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. Company that has been manufacturing variable refrigerant volume heat pump equipment for at least 5 years.

B. Installer Qualifications: Trained and approved by manufacturer of equipment.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle equipment and refrigerant piping according to manufacturer's recommendations.

1.07 WARRANTY
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Variable Refrigerant Flow HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 2
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. CARRIER.

B. Substitutions: Systems manufactured by other manufacturers will not be considered.

2.02 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
A. Performance Requirements: See Drawings for additional requirements.

2.03 AIR-SOURCE OUTDOOR UNITS
A. Air Conditioning Type:

1. DX refrigeration unit piped to one or more compatible indoor units either directly or indirectly through one or more intermediate refrigeration branch units.

B. Unit Cabinet:

1. Capable of being installed with wiring and piping to the left, right, rear or bottom.

2. Designed to allow side-by-side installation with minimum spacing.

3. Weatherproof and corrosion resistant; rust-proofed mild steel panels coated with baked enamel finish.

4. Sound Pressure Level: 55 dB measured at 3 feet from front of unit.

C. Heat Sink Side:

1. Condenser Fans:
a. Provide minimum of 2 fans for each condenser within the outdoor unit. b. Minimum External Static Pressure: Factory set at 0.12 in-wc. c. Fan Type: Vertical discharging, direct-driven propeller type with variable speed operation using DC-controlled ECM motors mechanically connected using permanently lubricated bearings having whole assembly protected with fan guards.

2. Condenser Coils:
a. Hi-X seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form mechanical bond; waffle louver fin and rifled bore tube design to ensure high efficiency performance. b. Corrosion Protection: Provide MODINE Insitu spray coating or equal on equipment casing and coil thatmeets ASTM B117 standards for 10,000 hour corrosion, UV & moisture protection.

D. Refrigeration Side:

1. Factory assembled and wired with instrumentation, switches, and controller(s) to handle unit specifics with direct coordination of remote controller(s) from indoor unit(s).

2. Refrigeration Circuit: ECM driven dual scroll compressors, fans, condenser heat sink coil, expansion valves, solenoid valves, distribution headers, capillaries, filters, shutoff valves, oil separators, service ports, and refrigerant regulator.

3. Refrigerant: R-410a factory charged. Controller to alarm when charge is below capacity.

4. Variable Volume Control: Modulate compressed refrigerant capacity automatically to maintain constant suction and condensing pressures under varying refrigerant volume required to handle remote loads. Include defrost control.

5. Provide refrigerant subcooling to ensure the liquid refrigerant does not flash when supplying to use indoor units.

6. Capable of heating operation at low end of operating range as specified, without additional low ambient controls or auxiliary heat source; during heating operation, reverse cycle, oil return, or defrost is not permitted due to potential reduction in space temperature.

7. Power Failure Mode: Automatically restarts operation after power failure without loss of programmed settings.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Variable Refrigerant Flow HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 3

8. Safety Devices: High pressure sensor with cut-out switch, low pressure sensor with cut- out switch, control circuit fuses, crankcase heaters, fusible plug, overload relay, inverter overload protector, thermal protectors for compressor and fan motors, overcurrent protection for the inverter and antirecycling timers.

9. Oil Recovery Cycle: Automatic, occurring 2 hours after start of operation and then every 8 hours of operation; maintain continuous heating during oil return operation.

E. Local Controls:

1. Include factory-wired instruments, sensors, switches, and safeties for unit control.

2. Configured to coordinate internal unit operation with remote indoor units and with built-in capacity to coordinate other manifolded outdoor units and remote refrigerant branch unit(s).

3. Include screen and button interface to setup operating schedules, setpoints, alarms, and remote unit setpoint coordination. Also used for system troubleshooting.

4. Self diagnostic, auto-check functions to detect malfunctions and display the type and location.

F. BAS, SCADA, or other Integrated Automation Link: ASHRAE Std 135 BACnet IP.

G. Power:

1. Electrical Requirement: 208 to 230 VAC, 3-phase, 60 Hz.

2. Outdoor Mounted: Provide fused NEMA 250 Type 4X disconnect switch.

3. Interior Mounted: Provide fused NEMA 250 Type 1 disconnect switch.

2.04 REFRIGERANT PIPING
A. Two-Pipe Run: Provide low-pressure vapor and high-pressure vapor gas pipes for each indoor unit selected for seasonal heating or cooling service.

B. Refrigerant Flow Balancing: Provide refrigerant piping joints and headers specifically designed to ensure proper refrigerant balance and flow for optimum system capacity and performance; T- style joints are prohibited. Follow manufacturing guidelines.

2.05 INDOOR UNITS
A. Manufacturers:

B. Minimum Unit Requirements:

1. DX Evaporator Coil:
a. Copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond; waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design; factory tested. b. 2-, 3-, or 4-row cross fin design with 14 to 17 fins per inch and flare end-connections. c. Provide thermistor on liquid and gas lines wired into local controller. d. Refrigerant circuits factory-charged with dehydrated air for field charging.

2. Fan Section:
a. Variable or three-speed ECM fan with automatic airflow adjustment; external static pressure selectable during commissioning.
b. Thermally protected, direct-drive motor with statically and dynamically balanced fan blades.
c. Minimum-adjustable external static pressure 0.32 in-wc; provide for mounting of field- installed ducts.

3. Local Unit Controls:
a. Exposed Thermostat: Wall-mounted thermostat wired into controller. To be tied by to Carrier i-VU
b. Temperature Zones:
1) Single Indoor Unit: Set served space(s) as the local temperature zone. 2) Multiple Indoor Units: For large zones, group and coordinate related indoor units with served spaces as the local temperature zone with each indoor unit as sub-zone.

4. Return Air Filter:

5. Condensate:
a. Built-in condensate drain pan with PVC drain connection for drainage. b. Units With Built-In Condensate Pumps: Provide condensate safety shutoff and alarm.
c. Units Without Built-In Condensate Pump: Provide built-in condensate float switch and wiring connections.

6. Cabinet Insulation: Sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation.

C. Ceiling-Recessed Cassette, Indoor Units:

1. Ceiling mount, 4-way supply air flow units with central return air grill, DX coil, tubed drain pan, and built-in controls with thermostat remotely coordinated by outdoor air unit to maintain local air temperature setpoint.

2. Cabinet Height: Maximum of 10 inches above face of ceiling.

3. Exposed Housing: White, impact resistant, with washable decoration panel.

4. Supply Airflow Adjustment:
a. Horizontally and vertically adjustable dampers with electronic actuators. b. Four-way distribution field-modifiable to 3-way and 2-way airflow. c. Three auto-swing positions, including standard, draft prevention and ceiling stain prevention.

5. Return Air Filter: Manufacturer's standard.

6. Sound Pressure Range: Between 28 to 33 dB(A) at low speed measured at 5 feet below the unit.

7. Fan: Direct-drive turbo type, with motor output range of 1/16 to 1/8 hp.

8. Condensate Pump: Built-in with minimum lift of 21 inches.

9. Fresh Air Intake: Provide side-mounted outdoor air intake duct connection.

10. Fresh Air Intake: Provide side-mounted outdoor air intake duct connection.

D. Wall Mounted, Indoor Units:

1. DX coil, tubed drain pan, and built-in controls with thermostat remotely coordinated by outdoor air unit to maintain local air temperature setpoint.

2. Variable or three-speed ECM cross-flow fan with automatic airflow adjustment; external static pressure selectable during commissioning.

3. Return Air Filter: Manufacturer's standard.

4. Provide exposed unit casing with removable front grille; foamed polystyrene and polyethylene sound insulation; wall mounting plate; polystyrene condensate drain pan.

5. Airflow Control: Auto-swing louver that closes automatically when unit stops; five (5) steps of discharge angle, set using remote controller; upon restart, discharge angle defaults to same angle as previous operation.

6. Condensate Pump: wall mounted, see installation detail.

7. Condensate Drain Connection: Back, with piping concealed in wall.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that required electrical services have been installed and are in the proper locations prior to starting installation.

B. Verify that condensate piping has been installed and is in the proper location prior to starting installation.

C. Notify Architect if conditions for installation are unsatisfactory.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install refrigerant piping in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. All refrigerant lines must be assceesible. Do not enclose lines in gysum wall.

D. Coordinate with installers of systems and equipment connecting to this system.

E. Connect indoor units to condensate piping.

F. Coordinate BAS, BMS, or Integrated Automation linking between local controller(s) and remote 230923.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements for additional requirements.

B. Provide manufacturer's field representative to inspect installation prior to startup.

3.04 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Prepare and start equipment and system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation within manufacturer's published tolerances.

3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed components of dirt, finger marks, and other disfigurements.

3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals for additional submittals.

B. See Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training for additional requirements.

C. Demonstrate proper operation of equipment to Owner's designated representative.

D. Demonstration: Demonstrate operation of system to Owner's personnel.

1. Use operation and maintenance data as reference during demonstration.

2. Conduct walking tour of project.

3. Briefly describe function, operation, and maintenance of each component.

3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed components from subsequent construction operations.

B. Replace exposed components broken or otherwise damaged beyond repair.

END OF SECTION 23 81 29
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Selective Demolition for Electrical 26 05 05 - 1
SECTION 26 05 05

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical demolition.

B. RELATED REQUIREMENTS

1. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional requirements for alterations work.

2. Section 02 84 00 - Polychlorinate Biphenyl (PCB) Remediation: Removal of equipment and materials containing substances regulated under the Federal Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA), including but not limited to those containing PCBs and mercury.

C. SUBMITTALS

1. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

2. Sustainable Design Documentation: Submit certification of removal and appropriate disposal of abandoned cables containing lead stabilizers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual sections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as indicated.

B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.

C. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents.

D. Report discrepancies to Owner before disturbing existing installation.

E. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings to be removed.

B. Coordinate utility service outages with utility company.

C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations.

D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration.

1. Obtain permission from Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system.

2. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

E. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is accepted.

Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration.

1. Notify Owner before partially or completely disabling system.

2. Notify local fire service.

3. Make notifications at least 24 hours in advance.

4. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

F. Existing Telephone System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration.

1. Notify Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system.

2. Notify telephone utility company at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system.

3. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Perform work for removal and disposal of equipment and materials containing toxic substances regulated under the Federal Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA) in accordance with applicable federal, state, and local regulations. Applicable equipment and materials include, but are not limited to:

1. PCB-containing electrical equipment, including transformers, capacitors, and switches.

2. PCB- and DEHP-containing lighting ballasts.

3. Mercury-containing lamps and tubes, including fluorescent lamps, high intensity discharge (HID), arc lamps, ultra-violet, high pressure sodium, mercury vapor, ignitron tubes, neon, and incandescent.

B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.

D. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.

E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that are not removed.

F. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.

G. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed.

H. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories.

I. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.

J. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.

K. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified.

3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. See Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal for additional requirements.

B. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or that are to be reused.

C. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.

D. Luminaires: Remove existing luminaires for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean all exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace broken electrical parts.

END OF SECTION 26 05 05
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables 26 05 19 - 1
SECTION 26 05 19

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Single conductor building wire.

B. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable.

C. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable.

D. Service entrance cable.

E. Armored cable.

F. Metal-clad cable.

G. Power and control tray cable.

H. Manufactured wiring systems.

I. Wiring connectors.

J. Electrical tape.

K. Heat shrink tubing.

L. Oxide inhibiting compound.

M. Wire pulling lubricant.

N. Cable ties.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.

B. Section 26 05 05 - Selective Demolition for Electrical: Disconnection, removal, and/or extension of existing electrical conductors and cables.

C. Section 26 05 13 - Medium-Voltage Cables: Cables and terminations for systems 601 V through 35,000 V.

D. Section 26 05 19.13 - Undercarpet Electrical Power Cables: Flat conductor cable and fittings for undercarpet power distribution.

E. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for grounding conductors and grounding connectors.

F. Section 26 05 36 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems: Additional installation requirements for cables installed in cable tray systems.

G. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

H. Section 26 21 00 - Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance: Additional requirements for electrical service conductors.

I. Section 26 31 00 - Photovoltaic Collectors: Additional wiring requirements for photovoltaic systems.

J. Section 28 46 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm system conductors and cables.

K. Section 31 23 16 - Excavation.

L. Section 31 23 16.13 - Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling.

M. Section 31 23 23 - Fill: Bedding and backfilling.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013 (Reapproved 2018).

B. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2023.

C. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes; 2010, with Editorial Revision (2020).

D. ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2020).

E. ASTM B800 - Standard Specification for 8000 Series Aluminum Alloy Wire for Electrical Purposes - Annealed and Intermediate Tempers; 2005 (Reapproved 2021).

F. ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 2017.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables 26 05 19 - 2
G. ASTM D4388 - Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting and Electrically Insulating Rubber Tapes; 2020.

H. FS A-A-59544 - Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation); 2008a (Validated 2019).

I. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

J. NECA 120 - Standard for Installing Armored Cable (AC) and Type Metal-Clad (MC) Cable; 2018.

K. NECA 121 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable (Type NM-B) and Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cable (Type UF); 2007.

L. NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy; 2021.

M. NETA ATS - Standard For Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Equipment And Systems; 2021.

N. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

O. UL 4 - Armored Cable; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Q. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

R. UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

S. UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

T. UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

U. UL 493 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

V. UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

W. UL 719 - Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

X. UL 854 - Service-Entrance Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Y. UL 1277 - Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber Members; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Z. UL 1569 - Metal-Clad Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other sections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.

2. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, listings, and available sizes, configurations, and stranding.

C. Sustainable Design Documentation: Submit manufacturer's product data on conductor and cable showing compliance with specified lead content requirements.

D. Manufactured Wiring System Shop Drawings: Provide plan views indicating proposed system layout with components identified; indicate branch circuit connections.

E. Design Data: Indicate voltage drop and ampacity calculations for aluminum conductors substituted for copper conductors. Include proposed modifications to raceways, boxes, wiring gutters, enclosures, etc. to accommodate substituted conductors.

F. Field Quality Control Test Reports.

G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables 26 05 19 - 3
H. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed circuiting arrangements. Record actual routingfor underground circuits.

I. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

2. Extra Manufactured Wiring Systems Cable Assemblies: One of each configuration, 6 feet length.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NEC.

B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower than 14 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When installation below this temperature is unavoidable, notify Architect and obtain direction before proceeding with work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by CED and product listing.

B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated, permitted, or required.

1. Exceptions:
a. Use manufactured wiring systems for branch circuits where concealed under raised floors.
1) Exception: Provide single conductor building wire in raceway for circuit homerun from distribution box to panelboard.
b. Use power and control tray cable or metal-clad cable for installation in cable tray.

C. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted.

D. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable is not permitted.

E. Armored cable is permitted only as follows:

1. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:
a. Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junction boxes to luminaires.
1) Maximum Length: 6 feet.

2. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used:
a. Unless approved by Owner.
b. Where not approved for use by the authority having jurisdiction. c. Where exposed to view.
d. Where exposed to damage.
e. For damp, wet, or corrosive locations.
f. For isolated ground circuits.

F. Metal-clad cable is permitted only as follows:

1. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables 26 05 19 - 4
a. Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junction boxes to luminaires.
1) Maximum Length: 6 feet.

2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide products that comply with requirements of CEC.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.

D. Comply with NEMA WC 70.

E. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.

F. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.

G. Conductor Material:

1. Provide copper conductors except where aluminum conductors are specifically indicated.

Substitution of aluminum conductors for copper is not permitted. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper unless specifically indicated as aluminum. Conductors designated with the abbreviation "AL" indicate aluminum.

2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B787M unless otherwise indicated.

3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.

4. Aluminum Conductors (only where specifically indicated or permitted for substitution):

AA-8000 series aluminum alloy conductors recognized by ASTM B800 and compact stranded in accordance with ASTM B801 unless otherwise indicated.

H. Minimum Conductor Size:12 AWG.

1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.
a. Exceptions:
1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop. 2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG, for voltage drop. 3) 20 A, 277 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.

2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG.

I. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with CEC but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

J. Conductor Color Coding:

1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.

2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation. a. Conductors size 4 AWG and larger may have black insulation color coded using vinyl color coding electrical tape.

3. Color Code:
a. 480Y/277 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:
1) Phase A: Brown.
2) Phase B: Orange.
3) Phase C: Yellow.
4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray.
b. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:
1) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables 26 05 19 - 5
3) Phase C: Blue.
4) Neutral/Grounded: White.
c. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.
d. Isolated Ground, All Systems: Green with yellow stripe. e. Travelers for 3-Way and 4-Way Switching: Pink.
f. For modifications or additions to existing wiring systems, comply with existing color code when existing code complies with cec and is approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

2.03 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE
A. Manufacturers:

1. Copper Building Wire:
a. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com.
b. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle. c. General Cable Technologies Corporation: www.generalcable.com/#sle. d. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Aluminum Building Wire (only where specifically indicated or permitted for substitution):
a. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle. b. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle.
c. Stabiloy, a brand of General Cable Technologies Corporation:
www.stabiloy.com/#sle.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.

C. Conductor Stranding:

1. Feeders and Branch Circuits:
a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.
b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

2. Control Circuits: Stranded.

D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

E. Insulation:

1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below. a. Size 4 AWG and Larger: Type XHHW-2.
b. Installed Underground: Type XHHW-2.
c. Fixture Wiring Within Luminaires: Type TFFN/TFN for luminaires with labeled maximum temperature of 90 degrees C; Approved suitable type for luminaires with labeled maximum temperature greater than 90 degrees C.

2. Aluminum Building Wire (only where specifically indicated or permitted for substitution):

Type XHHW-2.

2.04 NONMETALLIC-SHEATHED CABLE
A. Manufacturers:

1. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com/#sle.

2. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle.

3. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: CEC, Type NM multiple-conductor cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 719, Type NM-B.

C. Conductor Stranding:

1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.

2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

2.05 UNDERGROUND FEEDER AND BRANCH-CIRCUIT CABLE
A. Manufacturers:

1. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com/#sle.

2. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle.

3. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: CEC, Type UF multiple-conductor cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 493, Type UF-B.

C. Provide equipment grounding conductor unless otherwise indicated.

D. Conductor Stranding:

1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.

2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

E. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

F. Cable Jacket: Listed and labeled as sunlight resistant.

2.06 SERVICE ENTRANCE CABLE
A. Manufacturers:

1. Copper Service Entrance Cable:
a. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com/#sle.
b. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle. c. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Aluminum Service Entrance Cable:
a. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle. b. General Cable Technologies Corporation
c. Sttabiloy
d. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle.

B. Service Entrance Cable for Underground Use: CEC, Type USE single-conductor cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 854, Type USE-2, and with UL 44 Type RHH/RHW-2.

C. Conductor Stranding: Stranded.

D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

2.07 ARMORED CABLE
A. Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems Inc: www.afcweb.com/#sle.

2. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle.

3. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: CEC, Type AC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 4, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.

C. Conductor Stranding:

1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.

2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

E. Insulation: Type THHN.

F. Grounding: Combination of interlocking armor and integral bonding wire.

1. Provide additional full-size integral insulated equipment grounding conductor for redundant grounding, suitable for general purpose, non-essential electrical systems in non-hazardous patient care areas of health care facilities.

G. Armor: Steel, interlocked tape.

2.08 POWER AND CONTROL TRAY CABLE
A. Manufacturers:

1. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle.

2. General Cable Technologies Corporation

3. Okonite: www.okonite.com/#sle.

4. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle.

5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: CEC, Type TC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1277.

C. Where exposed run cable is indicated between cable tray and utilization equipment in qualifying industrial establishments as determined by authorities having jurisdiction, provide tray cable marked as Type TC-ER in accordance with CEC.

D. Conductor Stranding: Stranded.

E. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

F. Insulation: Type XHHW or XHHW-2.

G. Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor.

H. Jacket: PVC or Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE).

2.09 WIRING CONNECTORS
A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as applicable.

B. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: Comply with Section 26 05 26.

C. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps:

1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors.

2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors.

D. Wiring Connectors for Terminations:

1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations designed for terminal lugs.

2. Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified.

3. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device.

4. Provide motor pigtail connectors for connecting motor leads in order to facilitate disconnection.

5. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors where connectors are required.

6. Aluminum Conductors: Use compression connectors for all connections.

7. Stranded Conductors Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Use crimped terminals for connections to terminal screws.

8. Conductors for Control Circuits: Use crimped terminals for all connections.

E. Do not use insulation-piercing or insulation-displacement connectors designed for use with conductors without stripping insulation.

F. Do not use push-in wire connectors as a substitute for twist-on insulated spring connectors.

G. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applications and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations.

1. Manufacturers:
a. 3M: www.3m.com/#sle.
b. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com/#sle. c. NSI Industries LLC: www.nsiindustries.com/#sle.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

H. Push-in Wire Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com/#sle. b. NSI Industries LLC: www.nsiindustries.com/#sle.
c. Wago Corporation: www.wago.us/#sle.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables 26 05 19 - 8
I. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.

1. Manufacturers:

2. a. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com/#sle.
b. Bundy, LLC
c. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com/#sle.
d. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

J. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com/#sle.
b. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

K. Crimped Terminals: Nylon-insulated, with insulation grip and terminal configuration suitable for connection to be made.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com/#sle.
b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com/#sle.
c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.10 WIRING ACCESSORIES
A. Electrical Tape:

1. Manufacturers:
a. 3M: www.3m.com/#sle.
b. Plymouth Rubber Europa: www.plymouthrubber.com/#sle.

2. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code indicated; listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.

3. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.

4. Rubber Splicing Electrical Tape: Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) tape, complying with ASTM D4388; minimum thickness of 30 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 194 degrees F and short-term 266 degrees F overload service.

5. Electrical Filler Tape: Rubber-based insulating moldable putty, minimum thickness of 125 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 176 degrees F.

6. Varnished Cambric Electrical Tape: Cotton cambric fabric tape, with or without adhesive, oil-primed and coated with high-grade insulating varnish; minimum thickness of 7 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.

7. Moisture Sealing Electrical Tape: Insulating mastic compound laminated to flexible, all- weather vinyl backing; minimum thickness of 90 mil.

B. Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated 600 V; suitable for direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D.

1. Manufacturers:
a. 3M: www.3m.com/#sle.
b. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com/#sle.
c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

C. Oxide Inhibiting Compound: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com/#sle.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables 26 05 19 - 9
b. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com/#sle. c. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com/#sle.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

D. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed and suitable for use at the installation temperature.

1. Manufacturers:
a. 3M: www.3m.com/#sle.
b. American Polywater Corporation: www.polywater.com/#sle. c. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

E. Cable Ties: Material and tensile strength rating suitable for application.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com/#sle.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.

B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.

C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with CEC.

D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Circuiting Requirements:

1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.

2. When circuit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing required.

3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.

4. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location indicated.

5. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power- limited circuits in accordance with CEC.

6. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with CEC

7. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are indicated as separate, combining them together in a single raceway is not permitted.

8. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductors among up to three single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same raceway is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each individual branch circuit.

9. Provide oversized neutral/grounded conductors where indicated and as specified below. a. Provide 200 percent rated neutral for feeders fed from K-rated transformers. b. Provide 200 percent rated neutral for feeders serving panelboards with 200 percent rated neutral bus.

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

D. Install armored cable (Type AC) in accordance with NECA 120.

E. Install metal-clad cable (Type MC) in accordance with NECA 120.

F. Installation in Raceway:

1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other contaminants.

2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.

3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure.

4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by the manufacturer.

G. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner.

H. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with CEC using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems.

I. Terminate cables using suitable fittings.

1. Armored Cable (Type AC):
a. Use listed fittings and anti-short, insulating bushings. b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or insulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor. c. Do not use direct-bearing set-screw type fittings for cables with aluminum armor.

2. Metal-Clad Cable (Type MC):
a. Use listed fittings.
b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or insulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor. c. Do not use direct-bearing set-screw type fittings for cables with aluminum armor.

J. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet.

K. Where conductors are installed in enclosures for future termination by others, provide a minimum of 5 feet of slack.

L. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures.

M. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded conductors inside enclosures in accordance with CEC
N. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.

1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters.

2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors.

3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.

4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.

5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies.

O. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors.

P. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.

Q. Field-Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of integrally colored insulation as permitted in Part 2 under "Color Coding", apply half overlapping turns of tape at each termination and at each location conductors are accessible.

R. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00.

S. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables 26 05 19 - 11
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance test is required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is not required.

1. Disconnect surge protective devices (SPDs) prior to performing any high potential testing.

Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPDs connected.

D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.

END OF SECTION 26 05 19
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 1 SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Grounding and bonding requirements.

B. Conductors for grounding and bonding.

C. Connectors for grounding and bonding.

D. Ground bars.

E. Ground rod electrodes.

F. Chemically-enhanced ground electrodes.

G. Ground plate electrodes.

H. Ground enhancement material.

I. Ground access wells.

J. Pre-fabricated signal reference grids.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring: Static control flooring.

B. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additional requirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding.

1. Includes oxide inhibiting compound.

C. Section 26 05 36 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems: Additional grounding and bonding requirements for cable tray systems.

D. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

E. Section 26 31 00 - Photovoltaic Collectors: Additional grounding and bonding requirements for photovoltaic systems.

F. Section 26 56 00 - Exterior Lighting: Additional grounding and bonding requirements for pole- mounted luminaires.

G. Section 33 79 00 - Site Grounding.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. IEEE 81 - IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System; 2012.

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

C. NEMA GR 1 - Grounding Rod Electrodes and Grounding Rod Electrode Couplings; 2022.

D. NETA ATS - Standard For Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Equipment And Systems; 2021.

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

F. NFPA 99 - Health Care Facilities Code; 2024.

G. NFPA 780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems; 2023.

H. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Verify exact locations of underground metal water service pipe entrances to building.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide steel reinforcement complying with specified requirements for concrete-encased electrode.

3. For signal reference grids, coordinate the work with access flooring furnished in accordance with Section 09 69 00.

4. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install ground rod electrodes until final backfill and compaction is complete.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for grounding and bonding system components.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate proposed arrangement for signal reference grids. Include locations of items to be bonded and methods of connection.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

E. Field quality control test reports.

F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of grounding electrode system components and connections.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

D. Installer Qualifications for Signal Reference Grids: Company with minimum five years documented experience with high frequency grounding systems.

E. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS
A. Existing Work: Where existing grounding and bonding system components are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they are free from corrosion, integrity and continuity are verified, and where acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.

B. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted byCEC and product listing.

C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors, connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete grounding and bonding system.

D. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with CEC but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

E. Grounding System Resistance:

1. Achieve specified grounding system resistance under normally dry conditions unless otherwise approved by Architect. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.

2. Grounding Electrode System: Not greater than 5 ohms to ground, when tested according to IEEE 81 using "fall-of-potential" method.

3. Between Grounding Electrode System and Major Electrical Equipment Frames, System Neutral, and Derived Neutral Points: Not greater than 0.5 ohms, when tested using "point- to-point" methods.

F. Grounding Electrode System:

1. Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to form grounding electrode system.
a. Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 3 b. Install grounding electrode conductors in raceway where exposed to physical damage. Bond grounding electrode conductor to metallic raceways at each end with bonding jumper.

2. Metal Underground Water Pipe(s):
a. Provide connection to underground metal domestic and fire protection (where present) water service pipe(s) that are in direct contact with earth for at least 10 feet at an accessible location not more than 5 feet from the point of entrance to the building.
b. Provide bonding jumper(s) around insulating joints/pipes as required to make pipe electrically continuous.
c. Provide bonding jumper around water meter of sufficient length to permit removal of meter without disconnecting jumper.

3. Metal In-Ground Support Structure:
a. Provide connection to metal in-ground support structure that is in direct contact with earth in accordance with CEC.

4. Concrete-Encased Electrode:
a. Provide connection to concrete-encased electrode consisting of not less than 20 feet of either steel reinforcing bars or bare copper conductor not smaller than 4 AWG embedded within concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with earth in accordance with CEC.

5. Ground Rod Electrode(s):
a. Provide three electrodes in an equilateral triangle configuration unless otherwise indicated or required.
b. Space electrodes not less than 10 feet from each other and any other ground electrode.
c. Where location is not indicated, locate electrode(s) at least 5 feet outside building perimeter foundation as near as possible to electrical service entrance; where possible, locate in softscape (uncovered) area.
d. Provide ground enhancement material around electrode where indicated. e. Provide ground access well for each electrode.

6. Provide additional ground electrode(s) as required to achieve specified grounding electrode system resistance.

7. Ground Bar: Provide ground bar, separate from service equipment enclosure, for common connection point of grounding electrode system bonding jumpers as permitted in CEC. Connect grounding electrode conductor provided for service-supplied system grounding to this ground bar.
a. Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches unless otherwise indicated or required. b. Where ground bar location is not indicated, locate in accessible location as near as possible to service disconnect enclosure.
c. Ground Bar Mounting Height: 18 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

8. Ground Riser: Provide common grounding electrode conductor not less than 3/0 AWG for tap connections to multiple separately derived systems as permitted in CEC.

G. Service-Supplied System Grounding:

1. For each service disconnect, provide grounding electrode conductor to connect neutral (grounded) service conductor to grounding electrode system. Unless otherwise indicated, make connection at neutral (grounded) bus in service disconnect enclosure.

2. For each service disconnect, provide main bonding jumper to connect neutral (grounded) bus to equipment ground bus where not factory-installed. Do not make any other connections between neutral (grounded) conductors and ground on load side of service disconnect.

H. Grounding for Separate Building or Structure Supplied by Feeder(s) or Branch Circuits:

1. Provide grounding electrode system for each separate building or structure.

2. Provide equipment grounding conductor routed with supply conductors.

3. For each disconnecting means, provide grounding electrode conductor to connect equipment ground bus to grounding electrode system.

4. Do not make any connections and remove any factory-installed jumpers between neutral (grounded) conductors and ground.

I. Separately Derived System Grounding:

1. Separately derived systems include, but are not limited to:
a. Transformers (except autotransformers such as buck-boost transformers). b. Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS), when configured as separately derived systems.
c. Generators, when neutral is switched in the transfer switch.

2. Provide grounding electrode conductor to connect derived system grounded conductor to nearest effectively grounded metal building frame. Unless otherwise indicated, make connection at neutral (grounded) bus in source enclosure.

3. Provide bonding jumper to connect derived system grounded conductor to nearest metal building frame and nearest metal water piping in the area served by the derived system, where not already used as a grounding electrode for the derived system. Make connection at same location as grounding electrode conductor connection.

4. Where common grounding electrode conductor ground riser is used for tap connections to multiple separately derived systems, provide bonding jumper to connect the metal building frame and metal water piping in the area served by the derived system to the common grounding electrode conductor.

5. Outdoor Source: Where the source of the separately derived system is located outside the building or structure supplied, provide connection to grounding electrode at source in accordance with CEC.

6. Provide system bonding jumper to connect system grounded conductor to equipment ground bus. Make connection at same location as grounding electrode conductor connection. Do not make any other connections between neutral (grounded) conductors and ground on load side of separately derived system disconnect.

7. Where the source and first disconnecting means are in separate enclosures, provide supply-side bonding jumper between source and first disconnecting means.

J. Bonding and Equipment Grounding:

1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, and other normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance with CEC.

2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor.

3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipment grounding conductor proportionally in accordance with CEC.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus.

6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided to accommodate conduit movement.

7. Provide bonding for interior metal piping systems in accordance with CEC. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. Metal water piping where not already effectively bonded to metal underground water pipe used as grounding electrode.
b. Metal gas piping.
c. Metal process piping.

8. Provide bonding for interior metal air ducts.

9. Provide bonding for metal building frame.

10. Provide bonding for metal siding not effectively bonded through attachment to metal building frame.

11. Provide bonding and equipment grounding for pools and fountains and associated equipment in accordance with CEC.

12. Provide redundant grounding and bonding for patient care areas of health care facilities in accordance with CEC, and NFPA 99.

K. Isolated Ground System:

1. Where isolated ground receptacles or other isolated ground connections are indicated, provide separate isolated/insulated equipment grounding conductors.

2. Connect isolated/insulated equipment grounding conductors only to separate isolated/insulated equipment ground busses.

3. Connect the isolated/insulated equipment grounding conductors to the solidly bonded equipment ground bus only at the service disconnect or separately derived system disconnect. Do not make any other connections between isolated ground system and normal equipment ground system on the load side of this connection.

L. Communications Systems Grounding and Bonding:

1. Provide intersystem bonding termination at service equipment or metering equipment enclosure and at disconnecting means for any additional buildings or structures in accordance with CEC.

2. Provide bonding jumper in raceway from intersystem bonding termination to each communications room or backboard and provide ground bar for termination. a. Bonding Jumper Size: 6 AWG, unless otherwise indicated or required. b. Raceway Size: 3/4 inch trade size unless otherwise indicated or required. c. Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches unless otherwise indicated or required. d. Ground Bar Mounting Height: 18 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS
A. General Requirements:

1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable.

B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 05 26:

1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated. a. Exceptions:
1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact with earth.
2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in raceway).

2. Factory Pre-fabricated Bonding Jumpers: Furnished with factory-installed ferrules; size braided cables to provide equivalent gage of specified conductors.

C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding:

1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground, concealed and other inaccessible connections.
a. Exceptions:
1) Use mechanical connectors for connections to electrodes at ground access wells.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, or exothermic welded connections for accessible connections. a. Exceptions:
1) Use exothermic welded connections for connections to metal building frame.

4. Manufacturers - Mechanical and Compression Connectors:
a. Advanced Lightning Technology (ALT): www.altfab.com/#sle.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 6 b. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com/#sle.
c. Harger Lightning & Grounding: www.harger.com/#sle.
d. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

5. Manufacturers - Exothermic Welded Connections:
a. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com/#sle.
b. Cadweld, a brand of Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com/#sle. c. thermOweld, subsidiary of Continental Industries; division of Burndy LLC:
www.thermoweld.com/#sle.

D. Ground Bars:

1. Description: Copper rectangular ground bars with mounting brackets and insulators.

2. Size: As indicated.

3. Holes for Connections: As indicated or as required for connections to be made.

E. Ground Rod Electrodes:

1. Comply with NEMA GR 1.

2. Material: Copper-bonded (copper-clad) steel.

3. Size: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet length, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Where rod lengths of greater than 10 feet are indicated or otherwise required, sectionalized ground rods may be used.

5. Manufacturers:
a. Advanced Lightning Technology (ALT): www.altfab.com/#sle. b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com/#sle. c. Galvan Industries, Inc: www.galvanelectrical.com/#sle. d. Harger Lightning & Grounding: www.harger.com/#sle.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

F. Ground Enhancement Material:

1. Description: Factory-mixed conductive material designed for permanent and maintenance-free improvement of grounding effectiveness by lowering resistivity.

G. Ground Access Wells:

1. Description: Open bottom round or rectangular well with access cover for testing and inspection; suitable for the expected load at the installed location.

2. Size: As required to provide adequate access for testing and inspection, but not less than minimum size requirements specified.

3. Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less than 10 inches.

4. Cover: Factory-identified by permanent means with word "GROUND".

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been completed.

B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

C. Ground Rod Electrodes: Unless otherwise indicated, install ground rod electrodes vertically.

Where encountered rock prohibits vertical installation, Install at 45 degree angle or bury horizontyally in trench at least 30 inches (750 mm) deep in accordance with cec, or provide ground plates.

1. Outdoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated, install with top of rod 6 inches below finished grade.

2. Indoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated, install with 4 inches of top of rod exposed.

D. Ground Plate Electrodes: Unless otherwise indicated, install ground plate electrodes at a depth of not less than 30 inches.

E. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.

1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.

2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces.

3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies.

F. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.

D. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.

E. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with specified requirements.

F. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions taken.

END OF SECTION 26 05 26
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 1 SECTION 26 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Support and attachment requirements and components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other electrical work.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.

B. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Materials and requirements for fabricated metal supports.

C. Section 26 05 33.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment requirements for conduits.

D. Section 26 05 36 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment requirements for cable tray.

E. Section 26 05 33.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment requirements for boxes.

F. Section 26 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.

G. Section 26 25 13 - Low-Voltage Busways: Additional support and attachment requirements for busway.

H. Section 26 31 00 - Photovoltaic Collectors: Photovoltaic module mounting systems.

I. Section 26 51 00 - Interior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for interior luminaires.

J. Section 26 51 33 - Luminaires, Ballasts, and Drivers - Lutron: Additional support and attachment requirements for luminaires.

K. Section 26 56 00 - Exterior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for exterior luminaires.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2017.

B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2023.

C. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel; 2023.

D. ASTM D635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position; 2022.

E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2023c.

F. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; 2004.

G. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

I. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

J. UL 5B - Strut-Type Channel Raceways and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment and components to be installed.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials required for installation.

3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at the installed locations.

4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete has fully cured in accordance with Section 03 30 00.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for channel (strut) framing systems, non-penetrating rooftop supports, and post-installed concrete and masonry anchors.

1. Fiberglass Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Include requirements for strength derating according to ambient temperature.

C. Shop Drawings: Include details for fabricated hangers and supports where materials or methods other than those indicated are proposed for substitution.

D. Derating Calculations for Fiberglass Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Indicate load ratings adjusted for applicable service conditions.

E. Evaluation Reports: For products specified as requiring evaluation and recognition by ICC Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES), provide current ICC-ES evaluation reports upon request.

F. Installer's Qualification Statement: Include evidence of compliance with specified requirements.

G. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with CEC.

B. Comply with applicable building code.

C. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

D. Installer Qualifications for Field-Welding: As specified in Section 05 50 00.

E. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. General Requirements:

1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work.

2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended, where applicable.

3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be supported. Include consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable.

4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by CEC, and product listing.

5. Do not use wire, chain, perforated pipe strap, or wood for permanent supports unless specifically indicated or permitted.

6. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where installed.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 3 a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated.
b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel, stainless steel, or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated.
c. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633. d. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.

B. Components for Vibration Isolation and/or Seismic Controls: Comply with Section 26 05 48.

C. Materials for Metal Fabricated Supports: Comply with Section 05 50 00.

D. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be supported.

1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.

2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.

3. Manufacturers:
a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation:
www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.
b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com/#sle. c. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle. d. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

E. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation:
www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.
b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com/#sle. c. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle. d. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

F. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel (strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of supports.

1. Comply with MFMA-4.

2. Channel (Strut) Used as Raceway (only where specifically indicated): Listed and labeled as complying with UL 5B.

3. Channel Material:
a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use painted steel, zinc-plated steel, or galvanized steel. b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel.

4. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gage, 0.1046 inch.

5. Minimum Channel Dimensions: 1-5/8 inch width by 13/16 inch height.

6. Manufacturers:
a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle. b. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.
c. Unistrut, a brand of Atkore International Inc: www.unistrut.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. e. Source Limitations: Furnish channels (struts) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware produced by a single manufacturer.

G. Fiberglass Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot fiberglass channel (strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of supports.

1. Channel Material: Use polyester resin or vinyl ester resin.

2. Minimum Channel Dimensions: 1-5/8 inch width by 1 inch height.

3. Flammability: Fire retardant with NFPA 101, Class A flame spread index (maximum of 25) when tested in accordance with ASTM E84; self-extinguishing in accordance with ASTM D635.

4. Manufacturers:
a. Enduro Composites: www.endurocomposites.com/#sle.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. c. Source Limitations: Furnish channels (struts) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware produced by a single manufacturer.

H. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.

1. Minimum Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:
a. Equipment Supports: 1/2 inch diameter.
b. Busway Supports: 1/2 inch diameter.
c. Single Conduit up to 1 inch (27 mm) trade size: 1/4 inch diameter. d. Single Conduit larger than 1 inch (27 mm) trade size: 3/8 inch diameter. e. Trapeze Support for Multiple Conduits: 3/8 inch diameter. f. Outlet Boxes: 1/4 inch diameter.
g. Luminaires: 1/4 inch diameter.

I. Non-Penetrating Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with thermoplastic or rubber bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetrating the roofing assembly, with support fixtures as specified.

1. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing assembly.

2. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as indicated for equivalent indoor hangers and supports.

3. Mounting Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches under supported component to top of roofing.

4. Manufacturers:
a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle. b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com/#sle. c. PHP Systems/Design: www.phpsd.com/#sle.
d. Unistrut, a brand of Atkore International Inc: www.unistrut.com/#sle. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

J. Anchors and Fasteners:

1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener types indicated for the specified applications.

2. Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts, expansion anchors, or screw anchors.

3. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors.

4. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts.

5. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts.

6. Steel: Use beam clamps, machine bolts, or welded threaded studs.

7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.

8. Wood: Use wood screws.

9. Plastic and lead anchors are not permitted.

10. Powder-actuated fasteners are not permitted.

11. Hammer-driven anchors and fasteners are not permitted.

12. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel (strut) and spot inserts specifically designed to be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors. a. Comply with MFMA-4.
b. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel.
c. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel (strut) framing system.

13. Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Evaluated and recognized by ICC Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES) for compliance with applicable building code.

14. Manufacturers - Mechanical Anchors:
a. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com/#sle.
b. ITW Red Head, a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc: www.itwredhead.com/#sle. c. Powers Fasteners, Inc: www.powers.com/#sle.
d. Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc: www.strongtie.com/#sle.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

C. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services, LLC (ICC-ES) evaluation report conditions of use where applicable.

D. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid.

F. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof deck.

G. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer.

H. Provide required vibration isolation and/or seismic controls in accordance with Section 26 05

48. I. Equipment Support and Attachment:

1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to support equipment as required.

2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.

3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted equipment on properly sized 3 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00.

5. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own weight for support.

J. Conduit Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 05 33.13.

K. Cable Tray Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 05 36.

L. Box Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 05 33.16.

M. Busway Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 25 13.

N. Interior Luminaire Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 51 00.

O. Exterior Luminaire Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 56 00.

P. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete seepage during concrete pour.

Q. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

R. Remove temporary supports.

S. Identify independent electrical component support wires above accessible ceilings (only where specifically indicated or permitted) with color distinguishable from ceiling support wires in accordance with CEC.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.

C. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.

D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components.

END OF SECTION 26 05 29
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 - 1
SECTION 26 05 33.13

CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).

B. Aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC).

C. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

D. PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).

E. Flexible metal conduit (FMC).

F. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).

G. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

H. Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit.

I. Electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT).

J. Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit (LFNC).

K. Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC).

L. Conduit fittings.

M. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete encasement of conduits.

B. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.

C. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Metal clad cable (Type MC), armored cable (Type AC), and manufactured wiring systems, including uses permitted.

D. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

1. Includes additional requirements for fittings for grounding and bonding.

E. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

F. Section 26 05 33.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.

G. Section 26 05 33.23 - Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems.

H. Section 26 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.

I. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

J. Section 26 21 00 - Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance: Additional requirements for electrical service conduits.

K. Section 27 10 00 - Structured Cabling: Additional requirements for communications systems conduits.

L. Section 31 23 16 - Excavation.

M. Section 31 23 16.13 - Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling.

N. Section 31 23 23 - Fill: Bedding and backfilling.

O. Section 33 71 19 - Electrical Underground Ducts, Ductbanks, and Manholes.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005.

B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); 2005.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 - 2
C. ANSI C80.5 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit (ERAC); 2005.

D. ANSI C80.6 - American National Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC); 2005.

E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.

F. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); 2013.

G. NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC); 2003.

H. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; 2012.

I. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit; 2005.

J. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit; 2013.

K. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; 2015.

L. NEMA TC 13 - Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (ENT); 2014.

M. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

N. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

O. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Q. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

R. UL 651 - Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

S. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

T. UL 1242 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.

2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.

3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipment installed under other sections or by others.

4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve the integrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is complete between outlet, junction and splicing points.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conduits and fittings.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate proposed arrangement for conduits to be installed within structural concrete slabs, where permitted.

2. Include proposed locations of roof penetrations and proposed methods for sealing.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underground, conduits embedded within concrete slabs, and conduits 2 inch (53 mm) trade size and larger.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of CEC.

B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by CEC and product listing.

B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated for the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

C. Underground:

1. Under Slab on Grade: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, rigid PVC conduit, or reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC).

2. Exterior, Direct-Buried: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metallic conduit (IMC), PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, rigid PVC conduit, or reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC).

3. Exterior, Embedded Within Concrete: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metallic conduit (IMC), PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, rigid PVC conduit, or reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC).

4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit where emerging from underground.

5. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit larger than 2 inch (53 mm) trade size is provided, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit elbows for bends.

6. Where steel conduit is installed in direct contact with earth where soil has a resistivity of less than 2000 ohm-centimeters or is characterized as severely corrosive based on soils report or local experience, use corrosion protection tape to provide supplementary corrosion protection or use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

7. Where steel conduit emerges from concrete into soil, use corrosion protection tape to provide supplementary corrosion protection for a minimum of 4 inches on either side of where conduit emerges or use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

D. Embedded Within Concrete:

1. Within Slab on Grade (within structural slabs only where approved by Structural Engineer): Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, rigid PVC conduit, or reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC).

2. Within Slab Above Ground (within structural slabs only where approved by Structural Engineer): Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, rigid PVC conduit, or reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC).

3. Within Concrete Walls Above Ground: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, rigid PVC conduit, or reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC).

4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit where emerging from concrete.

E. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT). Do not use MC cable in walls or ceilings except for the final connection to lighting fixtures, and less than 6' lengths.

F. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

G. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

H. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

I. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

1. Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to:
a. Where exposed below 8 feet, except within electrical and communication rooms or closets.

J. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

K. Concealed, Exterior, Not Embedded in Concrete or in Contact With Earth: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A. Existing Work: Where existing conduits are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they comply with specified requirements, are free from corrosion, and integrity is verified by pulling a mandrel through them.

B. Electrical Service Conduits: Also comply with Section 26 21 00.

C. Communications Systems Conduits: Also comply with Section 27 10 00.

D. Fittings for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 05 26.

E. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.

F. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

G. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

1. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.

2. Underground, Interior: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.

3. Underground, Exterior: 1 inch (27 mm) trade size.

H. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with CEC but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A. Manufacturers:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com/#sle.

2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com/#sle.

3. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries www.wheatland.com/#sle.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

C. Fittings:

1. Manufacturers:
a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com/#sle.
b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 - 5
c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

3. Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 1203 for the classification of the installed location.

4. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.

5. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.

2.04 ALUMINUM RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A. Manufacturers:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com/#sle.

2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com/#sle.

3. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries: www.wheatland.com/#sle.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: CEC, Type RMC aluminum rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.5 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6A.

C. Fittings:

1. Manufacturers:
a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com/#sle.
b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

3. Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 1203 for the classification of the installed location.

4. Material: Use aluminum.

5. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.

2.05 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC)
A. Manufacturers:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit www.alliedeg.com/#sle.

2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com/#sle.

3. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries: www.wheatland.com/#sle.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type IMC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.6 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1242.

C. Fittings:

2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.

2.06 PVC-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 - 6
A. Manufacturers:

1. Thomas & Betts Corporation www.tnb.com/#sle.

2. Robroy Industries www.robroy.com/#sle.

3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL

6. C. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil.

D. Interior Coating: Urethane, minimum thickness of 2 mil.

E. PVC-Coated Fittings:

1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC-coated conduit to be installed.

2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

4. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 40 mil.

F. PVC-Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 15 mil.

2.07 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)
A. Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com/#sle.

2. Electri-Flex Company www.electriflex.com/#sle.

3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com/#sle.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: CEC, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.

C. Fittings:

1. Manufacturers:
a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com/#sle.
b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co www.emerson.com/#sle. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.

2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

2.08 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)
A. Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com/#sle.

2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com/#sle.

3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com/#sle.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: CEC, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360.

C. Fittings:

1. Manufacturers:
a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc www.bptfittings.com/#sle.
b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

2.09 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Manufacturers:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit www.alliedeg.com/#sle.

2. Republic Conduit www.republic-conduit.com/#sle.

3. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries: www.wheatland.com/#sle.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: CEC, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797.

C. Fittings:

2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.

4. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or set-screw type. a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.
b. Do not use set-screw type connectors and couplings.

5. Damp or Wet Locations (where permitted): Use fittings listed for use in wet locations.

6. Embedded Within Concrete (where permitted): Use fittings listed as concrete-tight.

Fittings that require taping to be concrete-tight are acceptable.

2.10 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:

1. Cantex Inc: www.cantexinc.com/#sle.

2. Carlon, a brand of Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.carlon.com/#sle.

3. JM Eagle www.jmeagle.com/#sle.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: CEC, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated, Schedule 80 where subject to physical damage; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degrees C.

C. Fittings:

1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected.

2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; material to match conduit.

2.11 REINFORCED THERMOSETTING RESIN CONDUIT (RTRC)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RTRC reinforced thermosetting resin conduit complying with NEMA TC 14 (SERIES).

B. Supports: Per manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Fittings: Same type and manufacturer as conduit to be connected.

2.12 ACCESSORIES
A. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 20 mil.

B. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the conduit to be installed.

C. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings to be installed.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 - 8
D. Epoxy Adhesive for RTRC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings to be installed.

E. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force.

F. Sealing Compound for Sealing Fittings: Listed for use with the particular fittings to be installed.

G. Modular Seals for Conduit Penetrations: Rated for minimum of 40 psig; Suitable for the conduits to be installed.

H. Duct Bank Spacers: Nonmetallic; designed for maintaining conduit/duct spacing for concrete encasement in open trench installation; suitable for the conduit/duct arrangement to be installed.

1. Products:
a. Advance Products & Systems, LLC; Duct Bank Spacers: www.apsonline.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

I. Bore Spacers: Nonmetallic; designed for maintaining conduit/duct spacing for installation within casing; furnished with roller wheels to facilitate installation, openings to facilitate grout flow, and holes for stabilization cable; suitable for the casing and conduit/duct arrangement to be installed.

1. Products:
a. Advance Products & Systems, LLC; Bore Spacers: www.apsonline.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.

D. Install aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 102.

E. Install intermediate metal conduit (IMC) in accordance with NECA 101.

F. Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by the manufacturer.

G. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111.

H. Conduit Routing:

1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic.

2. When conduit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing required.

3. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.

4. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Electrical rooms.
b. Mechanical equipment rooms.
c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.

5. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed:
a. Across floors.
b. Across roofs.
c. Across top of parapet walls.
d. Across building exterior surfaces.

6. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortest possible manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel or perpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contours where practical.

7. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access.

8. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends between pull points.

9. Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet between pull points.

10. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible.

11. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings where moisture may collect.

12. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems.

13. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. Heaters.
b. Hot water piping.
c. Flues.

14. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack.

I. Conduit Support:

1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Provide required vibration isolation and/or seismic controls in accordance with Section 26 05 48.

3. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

4. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles.

5. Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit. a. Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations to provide space between conduit and mounting surface.

6. Use metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel surface-mounted conduits.

7. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod.

8. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits.

9. Use non-penetrating rooftop supports to support conduits routed across rooftops (only where approved).

10. Use of spring steel conduit clips for support of conduits is not permitted.

11. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted. a. For securing conduits to studs in hollow stud walls. b. For suspending conduits supported by spring steel conduit clips (only where specifically indicated or permitted).

12. Where conduit support intervals specified in NFPA 70 and NECA standards differ, comply with the most stringent requirements.

J. Connections and Terminations:

1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections.

2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads.

3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.

4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into connectors.

5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.

6. Where spare conduits stub up through concrete floors and are not terminated in a box or enclosure, provide threaded couplings equipped with threaded plugs set flush with finished floor.

7. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect conductors.

8. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity.

K. Penetrations:

1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.

2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.

4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.

5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to prevent entry of moisture and gases.

6. Provide suitable modular seal where conduits penetrate exterior wall below grade.

7. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of membrane.

8. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals.

9. Provide metal escutcheon plates for conduit penetrations exposed to public view.

10. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00.

L. Underground Installation:

1. Provide trenching and backfilling in accordance with Section 31 23 16.13.

2. Minimum Cover, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:
a. Underground, Exterior: 24 inches.
b. Under Slab on Grade: 12 inches to bottom of slab.

3. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 26 05 53 along entire conduit length for service entrance where not concrete-encased.

M. Embedment Within Structural Concrete Slabs (only where approved by Structural Engineer):

1. Include proposed conduit arrangement with submittals.

2. Maximum Conduit Size: 1 inch (27 mm) unless otherwise approved.

3. Install conduits within middle one third of slab thickness.

4. Secure conduits to prevent floating or movement during pouring of concrete.

N. Concrete Encasement: Where conduits not otherwise embedded within concrete are indicated to be concrete-encased, provide concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 00 with minimum concrete cover of 3 inches on all sides unless otherwise indicated.

O. Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Where conduits cross boundaries of hazardous (classified) locations, provide sealing fittings located as indicated or in accordance with NFPA 70.

P. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This includes, but is not limited to:

1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.

2. Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit installed above ground to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction.

3. Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC) conduit installed above ground to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction.

4. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.

Q. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to:

1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.

2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces.

3. Where conduits penetrate coolers or freezers.

R. Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be installed by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end.

S. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

T. Identify conduits in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.

C. Where coating of PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) contains cuts or abrasions, repair in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.

3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.

3.05 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation of conductors.

END OF SECTION 26 05 33.13
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.16 - 1
SECTION 26 05 33.16

BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction and pull boxes.

B. Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches.

C. Boxes and enclosures for integrated power, data, and audio/video.

D. Boxes for hazardous (classified) locations.

E. Floor boxes.

F. Underground boxes/enclosures.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.

C. Section 08 31 00 - Access Doors and Panels: Panels for maintaining access to concealed boxes.

D. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

E. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

F. Section 26 05 33.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems:

1. Conduit bodies and other fittings.

2. Additional requirements for locating boxes to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points.

G. Section 26 05 33.23 - Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems:

1. Accessory boxes designed specifically for surface raceway systems.

2. Lay-in wireways and wiring troughs with removable covers.

H. Section 26 05 39 - Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems: Junction boxes for underfloor duct systems.

I. Section 26 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.

J. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

K. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices:

1. Wall plates.

2. Floor box service fittings.

3. Poke-through assemblies.

4. Access floor boxes.

5. Additional requirements for locating boxes for wiring devices.

L. Section 26 28 13 - Fuses: Spare fuse cabinets.

M. Section 27 10 00 - Structured Cabling: Additional requirements for communications systems outlet boxes.

N. Section 33 71 19 - Electrical Underground Ducts, Ductbanks, and Manholes: Concrete manholes for electrical systems.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2016.

C. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; 2014.

D. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; 2013 (Reaffirmed 2020).

E. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports; 2013 (Reaffirmed 2020).

F. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2020.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.16 - 2
G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

H. SCTE 77 - Specifications for Underground Enclosure Integrity; 2023.

I. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

J. UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

L. UL 514C - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by CEC.

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors, clamps, support fittings, and devices, calculated according to CEC.

4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of connected conduits, calculated according to CEC.

5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others.

6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity.

7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush- mounted boxes where indicated.

8. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for cabinets and enclosures, boxes for hazardous (classified) locations, floor boxes, and underground boxes/enclosures.

1. Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Include reports for load testing in accordance with SCTE 77 certified by a professional engineer or an independent testing agency upon request.

C. Samples:

1. Floor Boxes: Provide one sample(s) of each floor box proposed for substitution upon request.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations for outlet and device boxes, pull boxes, cabinets and enclosures, floor boxes, and underground boxes/enclosures.

F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

2. Keys for Lockable Enclosures: Two of each different key.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of CEC.

B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 BOXES
A. General Requirements:

1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by CEC and product listing.

2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.

3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with CEC but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate.

B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull Boxes:

1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required.

2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers.

3. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes where exposed galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or exposed intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is used.

4. Use cast aluminum boxes where aluminum rigid metal conduit is used.

5. Use nonmetallic boxes where exposed rigid PVC conduit is used.

6. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete.

7. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls.

8. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where required.

9. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction.

10. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.

11. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A.

12. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A; furnish with threaded hubs.

13. Nonmetallic Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2, and list and label as complying with UL 514C.

14. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of luminaire where required.

15. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not use field-connected gangable boxes unless specifically indicated or permitted.

16. Minimum Box Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
a. Wiring Devices (Other Than Communications Systems Outlets): 4 inch square by 1-1/2 inch deep (100 by 38 mm) trade size.
b. Communications Systems Outlets: Comply with Section 27 10 00.

17. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 27 26.

18. Manufacturers:
a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation:
www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.
b. Hubbell Incorporated; Bell Products: www.hubbell-rtb.com/#sle. c. Hubbell Incorporated; RACO Products: www.hubbell-rtb.com/#sle. d. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.
f. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.16 - 4
C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:

1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL 508A.

2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1, painted steel. b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R, painted steel.

3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:
a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated. b. Boxes 6 square feet and Larger: Provide sectionalized screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures.

4. Cabinets and Hinged-Cover Enclosures, Other Than Junction and Pull Boxes:
a. Provide lockable hinged covers, all locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated. b. Back Panels: Painted steel, removable.
c. Terminal Blocks: Provide voltage/current ratings and terminal quantity suitable for purpose indicated, with 25 percent spare terminal capacity.

5. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise indicated.

6. Manufacturers:
a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle. b. Hoffman, a brand of Pentair Technical Products: www.hoffmanonline.com/#sle. c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiegmann Products: www.hubbell-wiegmann.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

D. Boxes and Enclosures for Integrated Power, Data, and Audio/Video: Size and configuration as indicated or as required with partitions to separate services; field-connected gangable boxes may be used.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

E. Boxes for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 1203 for the classification of the installed location.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Appleton, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle. b. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation:
www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.
c. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Products: www.hubbell-killark.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

F. Floor Boxes:

1. Description: Floor boxes compatible with floor box service fittings provided in accordance with Section 26 27 26; with partitions to separate multiple services; furnished with all components, adapters, and trims required for complete installation.

2. Use cast iron floor boxes within slab on grade.

3. Use sheet-steel or cast iron floor boxes within slab above grade.

4. Metallic Floor Boxes: Fully adjustable (with integral means for leveling adjustment prior to and after concrete pour).

5. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of floor box service fittings.

G. Underground Boxes/Enclosures:

1. Description: In-ground, open bottom boxes furnished with flush, non-skid covers with legend indicating type of service and stainless steel tamper resistant cover bolts.

2. Size: As indicated on drawings.

3. Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less than 12 inches.

4. Provide logo on cover to indicate type of service.

5. Applications:

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.16 - 5
a. Sidewalks and Landscaped Areas Subject Only to Occasional Nondeliberate Vehicular Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures, with minimum SCTE 77 Tier 8 load rating.
b. Parking Lots, in Areas Subject Only To Occasional Nondeliberate Vehicular Traffic:

Use polymer concrete enclosures, with minimum SCTE 77 Tier 15 load rating. c. Do not use polymer concrete enclosures in areas subject to deliberate vehicular traffic.

6. Polymer Concrete Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Comply with SCTE 77. a. Manufacturers:
1) Hubbell Incorporated; Quazite Products: www.hubbellpowersystems.com/#sle. 2) MacLean Highline: www.macleanhighline.com/#sle.
3) Oldcastle Precast, Inc: www.oldcastleprecast.com/#sle. 4) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. b. Combination fiberglass/polymer concrete boxes/enclosures are acceptable. c. Product(s):
1) MacLean Highline PHA Series: Straight wall, all-polymer concrete splice box/pull box; available Tier 8, Tier 15, and Tier 22 load ratings. (a) 11 by 18 by 12 inches nominal; Model PHA111812 (stackable). 2) MacLean Highline CHA Series: Fiberglass/polymer concrete splice box/pull box; available Tier 8 and Tier 15 load ratings.
(a) 11 by 18 by 12 inches nominal; Model CHA111812.
3) MacLean Highline CVA Series: Fiberglass/polymer concrete splice vault; available Tier 8, Tier 15, and Tier 22 load ratings.
(a) 30 by 48 by 18 inches nominal; Model CVA304818.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install boxes in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not indicated.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CEC.

D. Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems.

F. Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are indicated or permitted.

H. Box Locations:

1. Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section 08 31 00 as required where approved by the Architect.

2. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate.

3. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others. a. Switches, Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices: Comply with Section 26 27 26. b. Communications Systems Outlets: Comply with Section 27 10 00.

4. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes.

5. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints.

6. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location at different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line.

7. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide minimum 6 inches horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated.

8. Acoustic-Rated Walls: Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches horizontal separation.

9. Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire resistance will not be reduced.
a. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches separation where wall is constructed with individual noncommunicating stud cavities or protect both boxes with listed putty pads. b. Do not install flush-mounted boxes with area larger than 16 square inches or such that the total aggregate area of openings exceeds 100 square inches for any 100 square feet of wall area.

10. Locate junction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation of conductors, and to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points in accordance with Section 26 05 33.13.

11. Locate junction and pull boxes in the following areas, unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Architect:
a. Concealed above accessible suspended ceilings.
b. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.
c. Electrical rooms.
d. Mechanical equipment rooms.

I. Box Supports:

1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with CEC and Section 26 05 29 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Provide required seismic controls in accordance with Section 26 05 48.

3. Provide independent support from building structure except fro cast metal boxes (other than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connection in accordance with cec. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

4. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling grid or ceiling support system.

5. Use far-side support to secure flush-mounted boxes supported from single stud in hollow stud walls. Repair or replace supports for boxes that permit excessive movement.

J. Install boxes plumb and level.

K. Flush-Mounted Boxes:

1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface more than 1/4 inch or does not project beyond finished surface.

2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is flush with finished surface.

3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch at the edge of the box.

L. Floor-Mounted Cabinets: Mount on properly sized 3 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00.

M. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.

N. Metallic Floor Boxes: Install box level at the proper elevation to be flush with finished floor.

O. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Cut box flush with finished floor after concrete pour.

P. Underground Boxes/Enclosures:

1. Install enclosure on gravel base, minimum 6 inches deep.

2. Flush-mount enclosures located in concrete or paved areas.

3. Mount enclosures located in landscaped areas with top at 1 inch above finished grade.

4. Provide cast-in-place concrete collar constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00, minimum 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep, around enclosures that are not located in concrete areas.

5. Install additional bracing inside enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize box sidewall deflections during backfilling. Backfill with cover bolted in place.

Q. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V.

R. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00.

S. Close unused box openings.

T. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or designated for future use.

U. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

V. Identify boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material.

3.04 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until ready for installation of conductors.

END OF SECTION 26 05 33.16
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.23 - 1 SECTION 26 05 33.23

SURFACE RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface raceway systems.

B. Wireways.

C. Wall duct.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

1. Includes metal channel (strut) used as raceway.

C. Section 26 05 33.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 26 05 33.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.

E. Section 26 05 39 - Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems: Trench duct.

F. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

G. Section 26 27 23 - Indoor Service Poles.

H. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Receptacles.

I. Section 27 10 00 - Structured Cabling: Voice and data jacks.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2020.

D. NEMA PRP 5 - Installation Guidelines for Surface Nonmetallic Raceway; 2021.

E. UL 5 - Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

F. UL 5A - Nonmetallic Surface Raceways and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

G. UL 111 - Outline of Investigation for Multioutlet Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

H. UL 870 - Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the placement of raceways with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others.

2. Coordinate rough-in locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33.16 and conduit provided under Section 26 05 33.13 as required for installation of raceways provided under this section.

3. Verify minimum sizes of raceways with the actual conductors and components to be installed.

4. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install raceways until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

2. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of raceways is complete between outlet, junction and splicing points.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including dimensions, knockout sizes and locations, materials, fabrication details, finishes, service condition requirements, and accessories.

1. Surface Raceway Systems: Include information on fill capacities for conductors and cables.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Pre-wired Surface Raceway Systems: Provide plan and elevation views including dimensioned locations of wiring devices and circuiting arrangements.

2. Wireways: Provide dimensioned plan and elevation views including adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated.

D. Samples: Three of each type and color of surface raceway system specified, 6 inches in length.

E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of CEC.

B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 RACEWAY REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide all components, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Do not use raceways for applications other than as permitted by CEC and product listing.

2.02 SURFACE RACEWAY SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle.

2. MonoSystems, Inc: www.monosystems.com/#sle.

3. Wiremold, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Surface Metal Raceways: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 5.

C. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 5A.

D. Multioutlet Assemblies: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 111.

E. Metal Channel (Strut) Used as Raceway: Comply with Section 26 05 29.

F. Surface Raceway System:

1. Raceway Type: Single channel, painted steel.

2. Length: As indicated on the drawings.

3. Color: To be selected by Architect.

4. Accessory Device Boxes: Suitable for the devices to be installed; color to match raceway.

5. Integrated Device Provisions:
a. Receptacles:
1) Comply with Section 26 27 26, except for finishes.
2) Configuration: As indicated on the drawings.
3) Color: Match raceway.
4) Spacing: As indicated on the drawings.
b. Communications Outlets:

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.23 - 3 1) Voice and Data Jacks: As specified in Section 27 10 00. 2) Voice and Data Jacks: Include provisions for jacks furnished by others. 3) Configuration: As indicated on the drawings.
4) Spacing: As indicated on the drawings.

6. Products:
a. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.03 WIREWAYS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Cooper B-Line, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.

2. Enduro Composites: www.endurocomposites.com/#sle.

3. Hoffman, a brand of Pentair Technical Products: www.hoffmanonline.com/#sle.

4. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle.

5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: Lay-in wireways and wiring troughs with removable covers; listed and labeled as complying with UL 870.

C. Wireway Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

1. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1, painted steel with screw-cover.

2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R, painted steel with screw-cover; include provision for padlocking.

D. Finish for Painted Steel Wireways: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise indicated.

E. Minimum Wireway Size: 4 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

F. Where wireway size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

2.04 WALL DUCT
A. Manufacturers:

1. Dennis Filges Company, Inc: www.filgesco.com/#sle.

2. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle.

3. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle.

4. Wiremold, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle.

5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

6. Source Limitations: Where the wall duct system includes connections to trench duct as specified in Section 26 05 39, furnish wall duct and associated components produced by the same manufacturer as the trench duct to be installed.

B. Description: Metal raceways specifically designed for enclosure of wiring to X-ray machines and similar medical equipment; listed and labeled as complying with UL 870.

C. Material: Steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Mounting Provisions: Suitable for surface- or flush-mounting as indicated.

E. Size: As indicated on the drawings.

2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Factory test each production unit for pre-wired surface raceway systems to verify proper wiring.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that outlet boxes and conduit terminations are installed in proper locations and are properly sized in accordance with CEC to accommodate raceways.

C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive raceways and that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.

D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.23 - 4 A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

C. Install raceways plumb and level.

D. Arrange wireways and associated raceway connections to comply with CEC, including but not limited to requirements for deflected conductors and wireways used as pullboxes. Increase size of wireway where necessary.

E. Secure and support raceways in accordance with Section 26 05 29 at intervals complying with CEC and manufacturer's requirements.

F. Close unused raceway openings.

G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

H. Identify raceways in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect raceways for damage and defects.

C. Surface Raceway Systems with Integrated Devices: Test each wiring device to verify operation and proper polarity.

D. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective raceways.

3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.

3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed raceways from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION 26 05 33.23
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical
Systems 26 05 48 - 1
SECTION 26 05 48

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Vibration isolation requirements.

B. Seismic control requirements.

1. Includes requirements for seismic qualification of equipment not specified in this section.

C. Vibration-isolated equipment support bases.

D. Vibration isolators.

E. External seismic snubber assemblies.

F. Seismic restraint systems.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 45 33 - Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures.

B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

C. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Materials and requirements for fabricated metal supports.

D. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Electrical Component: Where referenced in this section in regards to seismic controls, applies to any portion of the electrical system subject to seismic evaluation in accordance with applicable codes, including distributed systems (e.g. conduit, cable tray).

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures; Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard.

B. ASCE 19 - Structural Applications of Steel Cables for Buildings; 2016.

C. ASHRAE (HVACA) - ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications; Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard.

D. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2022.

E. FEMA 413 - Installing Seismic Restraints for Electrical Equipment; 2004.

F. FEMA E-74 - Reducing the Risks of Nonstructural Earthquake Damage; 2012.

G. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

H. ICC-ES AC156 - Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Certification by Shake-Table Testing of Nonstructural Components; 2010, with Editorial Revision (2020).

I. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; 2004.

J. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

L. SMACNA (SRM) - Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems; 2008.

1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate selection and arrangement of vibration isolation and/or seismic control components with the actual equipment to be installed.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials required for installation.

3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at the installed locations.

4. Seismic Controls:
a. Coordinate the arrangement of seismic restraints with ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. b. Coordinate the work with other trades to accommodate relative positioning of essential and non-essential components in consideration of seismic interaction.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete has fully cured in accordance with Section 03 30 00.

1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Design Documents: Prepare and submit all information required for plan review and permitting by authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to floor plans, details, and calculations.

C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for products, including materials, fabrication details, dimensions, and finishes.

1. Seismic Controls: Include seismic load capacities.

D. Shop Drawings - Seismic Controls:

1. Include dimensioned plan views and sections indicating proposed electrical component locations and distributed system routing, with locations and details of gravity supports and seismic restraints and associated attachments.

2. Identify mounting conditions required for equipment seismic qualification.

3. Identify anchor manufacturer, type, minimum embedment, minimum spacing, minimum member thickness, and minimum edge distance requirements.

4. Indicate proposed arrangement of distributed system trapeze support groupings.

5. Indicate proposed locations for distributed system flexible fittings and/or connections.

6. Indicate locations of seismic separations where applicable.

7. Include point load drawings indicating design loads transmitted to structure at each attachment location.

E. Seismic Design Data:

1. Compile information on project-specific characteristics of actual installed electrical components necessary for determining seismic design forces required to design appropriate seismic controls, including but not limited to the following. a. Component operating weight and center of gravity.
b. Component elevation in the building in relation to the roof elevation (z/h). c. Component importance factor (Ip).
d. For distributed systems, component materials and connection methods. e. Component amplification factor (ap) and component response modification factor (Rp), determined in accordance with ASCE 7 tables.
f. Applicability of overstrength factor (for certain anchorage in concrete and masonry).

2. Include structural calculations, stamped or sealed by seismic controls designer, demonstrating suitability of seismic controls for seismic design forces.

F. Certification for seismically qualified equipment; identify basis for certification.

G. Evaluation Reports: For products specified as requiring evaluation and recognition by a qualified evaluation service, provide current evaluation reports.

H. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

I. Evidence of qualifications for seismic controls designer.

J. Evidence of qualifications for manufacturer.

K. Manufacturer’s detailed field testing and inspection procedures.

L. Field quality control test reports.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with CEC.

B. Comply with applicable building code.

C. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

D. Seismic Controls Designer Qualifications: Registered professional engineer licensed in the State in which the Project is located and with minimum five years experience designing seismic restraints for nonstructural components.

1. Designer may be employed by the manufacturer of the seismic restraint products.

E. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 VIBRATION ISOLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Design and provide vibration isolation systems to reduce vibration transmission to supporting structure from vibration-producing electrical equipment and/or electrical connections to vibration-isolated equipment.

B. Comply with applicable general recommendations of ASHRAE (HVACA), where not in conflict with other specified requirements:

C. General Requirements:

1. Select vibration isolators to provide required static deflection.

2. Select vibration isolators for uniform deflection based on distributed operating weight of actual installed equipment.

3. Select seismic type vibration isolators to comply with seismic design requirements, including conditions of equipment seismic certification where applicable.

4. Select vibration isolators for outdoor equipment to comply with wind design requirements.

5. Select vibration-isolated equipment support bases and associated vibration isolators to provide minimum 2 inch operating clearance beneath base unless otherwise indicated.

D. Equipment Isolation:

1. Transformers:
a. Specified vibration isolators are in addition to any factory-installed internal core and coil assembly vibration isolators unless otherwise indicated. b. Floor-Mounted Transformers, Non-Seismic Applications: Use resilent material isolator pads, resilient material isolator mounts, or open (unhoused) spring isolators. c. Floor-Mounted Transformers, Seismic Applications: Use seismic type resilient material isolator mounts or seismic type restrained spring isolators. d. Wall-Mounted Transformers, Non-Seismic Applications: Use resilient material isolator mounts.
e. Wall-Mounted Transformers, Seismic Applications: Use seismic type resilient material isolator mounts.
f. Minimum Static Deflection:
1) Transformers Mounted on Grade-Level Slabs: 0.25 inch deflection unless otherwise indicated.
2) Transformers Mounted at Above-Grade Levels: 0.5 inch deflection unless otherwise indicated.

E. Conduit Isolation:

1. Use flexible conduit or cable for electrical connections to vibration-isolated equipment, including equipment installed under other sections or by others. a. Minimum Length: 3 feet unless otherwise indicated.

2.02 SEISMIC CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical
Systems 26 05 48 - 4
A. Design and provide electrical component restraints, supports, and attachments suitable for seismic loads determined in accordance with applicable codes, as well as gravity and operating loads and other structural design considerations of the installed location. Consider wind loads for outdoor electrical components.

B. Seismic Design Criteria: As indicated on drawings.

C. Seismic Qualification of Equipment:

1. Provide special certification for electrical equipment furnished under other sections and assigned a component importance factor (Ip) of 1.5, certifying that equipment will remain operable following a design level earthquake.

2. Seismic qualification to be by shake table testing in accordance with recognized testing standard procedure, such as ICC-ES AC156, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Notify Architect and obtain direction where mounting restrictions required by conditions of seismic certification conflict with specified requirements.

4. Seismically qualified equipment to be furnished with factory-installed labels referencing certificate of compliance and associated mounting restrictions.

D. Premanufactured Modular Electrical Equipment: Where not otherwise seismically qualified, premanufactured modules 6 feet high and taller furnished under other sections to be designed in accordance with seismic provisions for nonbuilding structures.

E. Seismic Restraints:

1. Provide seismic restraints for electrical components except where exempt according to applicable codes and specified seismic design criteria, as approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Seismic Restraint Exemptions:
a. Exemptions for Seismic Design Category C:
1) Electrical components where either of the following apply:
(a) The component importance factor (Ip) is 1.0 and the component is positively attached to the structure.
(b) The component weighs 20 pounds or less or, in the case of a distributed system, 5 pounds per foot or less.
b. Exemptions for Seismic Design Category D, E, and F:
1) Discrete electrical components that are positively attached to the structure where either of the following apply:
(a) The component weighs 400 pounds or less, has a center of mass located 4 feet or less above the adjacent floor level, flexible connections are provided between the component and associated ductwork, piping, and conduit, and the component importance factor (Ip) is 1.0.
(b) The component weighs 20 pounds or less or, in the case of a distributed system, 5 pounds per foot or less.
c. Conduit, Cable Tray, and Raceway Exemptions, All Seismic Design Categories:
1) Raceways with component importance factor (Ip) of 1.0 where flexible connections are provided between cable tray or raceway and associated components, where cable tray or raceway is positively attached to the structure, and where one of the following apply:
(a) Trapeze supported conduits, cable trays, or raceways with trapeze assemblies using 3/8 inch diameter rod hangers not exceeding 12 inches in length from support point connection to the supporting structure, and the total weight supported by any single trapeze is 100 pounds or less. (b) Trapeze supported conduits, cable trays, or raceways with trapeze assemblies using 1/2 inch diameter rod hangers not exceeding 12 inches in length from support point connection to the supporting structure, and the total weight supported by any single trapeze is 200 pounds or less. (c) Trapeze supported conduits, cable trays, or raceways with trapeze assemblies using 1/2 inch diameter rod hangers not exceeding 24 inches in length from support point connection to the supporting structure, and the total weight supported by any single trapeze is 100 pounds or less.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical
Systems 26 05 48 - 5
(d) Hanger supported conduits, cable trays, or raceways with individual rod hangers 3/8 inch or 1/2 inch in diameter not exceeding 12 inches in length from support point connection to the supporting structure, and the total weight supported by any single rod is 50 pounds or less. 2) Conduits less than 2-1/2 inch trade size.
d. Lighting Exemptions, All Seismic Design Categories:
1) Suspended luminaires where attachments are designed to accommodate 1.4 times the operating weight acting in both the vertical and horizontal directions and connections to structure allow for 360 degree range of motion in the horizontal plane; arrange to prevent impact between luminaires and the structure or other nonstructural components.
2) Lay-in luminaires weighing less than 56 pounds secured to ceiling grid and provided with safety wires in accordance with ASTM E580/E580M.

3. Comply with applicable general recommendations of the following, where not in conflict with applicable codes, seismic design criteria, or other specified requirements:
a. ASHRAE (HVACA).
b. FEMA 413.
c. FEMA E-74.
d. SMACNA (SRM).

4. Seismic restraint capacities to be verified by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) or certified by an independent third party registered professional engineer acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

5. Seismic Type Vibration Isolators:
a. Comply with seismic design requirements, including conditions of equipment seismic certification where applicable.

6. External Seismic Snubber Assemblies:
a. Provide quantity and arrangement of external seismic snubber assemblies as required to restrain equipment in all directions (both lateral and vertical). b. Do not use external seismic snubber assemblies that restrain equipment only in one or more lateral directions (but not vertical) except where uplift forces are zero or are addressed by other restraints.

7. Seismic Restraint Systems:
a. Except where otherwise restricted, use of either cable or rigid restraints is permitted. b. Use only cable restraints to restrain vibration-isolated electrical components, including distributed systems.
c. Use only one restraint system type for a given electrical component or distributed system (e.g. conduit, cable tray) run; mixing of cable and rigid restraints on a given component/run is not permitted.
d. Size restraint elements, including anchorage, to resist seismic loads as necessary to restrain electrical component in all lateral directions; consider bracket geometry in anchor load calculations.
e. Use rod stiffener clips to attach bracing to hanger rods as required to prevent rod buckling from vertical (upward) compressive load introduced by cable or rigid restraints loaded in tension, in excess of downward tensile load due to supported electrical component weight.
f. Select hanger rods and associated anchorage as required to accommodate vertical (downward) tensile load introduced by rigid restraints loaded in compression, in addition to downward tensile load due to supported electrical component weight. g. Clevis hangers may only be used for attachment of transverse restraints; do not use for attachment of longitudinal restraints.
h. Where seismic restraints are attached to clevis hangers, provide clevis bolt reinforcement accessory to prevent clevis hanger deformation. i. Do not introduce lateral loads on open bar joist chords or the weak axis of beams, or loads in any direction at other than panel points unless approved by project Structural Engineer of Record.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical
Systems 26 05 48 - 6
j. Manufacturer's certified seismic restraint design may be submitted as an alternative to project-specific design and documentation, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Seismic Attachments:

1. Attachments to be bolted, welded, or otherwise positively fastened without consideration of frictional resistance produced by the effects of gravity.

2. Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Evaluated and recognized by ICC Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES) or qualified evaluation service acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for compliance with applicable building code, and qualified for seismic applications; concrete anchors to be qualified for installation in both cracked and uncracked concrete.

3. Do not use power-actuated fasteners.

4. Do not use friction clips (devices that rely on mechanically applied friction to resist loads).

Beam clamps may be used for supporting sustained loads where provided with restraining straps.

5. Comply with anchor minimum embedment, minimum spacing, minimum member thickness, and minimum edge distance requirements.

6. Concrete Housekeeping Pads:
a. Increase size of pad as required to comply with anchor requirements. b. Provide pad reinforcement and doweling to ensure integrity of pad and connection and to provide adequate load path from pad to supporting structure.

G. Seismic Interactions:

1. Include provisions to prevent seismic impact between electrical components and other structural or nonstructural components.

2. Include provisions such that failure of a component, either essential or nonessential, does not cause the failure of an essential component.

3. Comply with minimum clearance requirements between electrical equipment, distribution systems, and associated supports and fire protection sprinkler system drops and sprigs.

H. Seismic Relative Displacement Provisions:

1. Use suitable fittings or flexible connections to accommodate:
a. Relative displacements at connections between components, including distributed systems (e.g. conduit, cable tray); do not exceed load limits for equipment utility connections.
b. Relative displacements between component supports attached to dissimilar parts of structure that may move differently during an earthquake. c. Design displacements at seismic separations.
d. Anticipated drifts between floors.

2.03 VIBRATION-ISOLATED EQUIPMENT SUPPORT BASES
A. Manufacturers:

1. Vibration-Isolated Equipment Support Bases:
a. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc: www.kineticsnoise.com/#sle. b. Mason Industries: www.mason-ind.com/#sle.
c. Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc: www.veco-nyc.com/#sle.

2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

3. Source Limitations: Furnish vibration-isolated equipment support bases and associated components and accessories produced by the same manufacturer as the vibration isolators and obtained from a single supplier.

B. Vibration-Isolated Structural Steel Bases:

1. Description: Engineered structural steel frames with integral mounting provisions for vibration isolators, sized and configured for mounting of equipment.

C. Vibration-Isolated Concrete Inertia Bases:

1. Description: Concrete-filled engineered steel forms with integral mounting provisions for vibration isolators, sized and configured for mounting of equipment.

2. Minimum Base Depth: 6 inches.

3. Minimum Base Mass (Including Concrete): 1.5 times weight of supported equipment.

4. Concrete Reinforcement: Welded or tied reinforcing bars running both ways in a single layer.

5. Concrete: Filled on site with minimum 3000 psi concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 00.

2.04 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Vibration Isolators:
a. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc: www.kineticsnoise.com/#sle. b. Mason Industries: www.mason-ind.com/#sle.
c. Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc: www.veco-nyc.com/#sle.

2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

3. Source Limitations: Furnish vibration-isolators and associated accessories produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.

B. General Requirements:

1. Resilient Materials for Vibration Isolators: Oil, ozone, and oxidant resistant.

2. Spring Elements for Spring Isolators:
a. Color code or otherwise identify springs to indicate load capacity. b. Lateral Stability: Minimum lateral stiffness to vertical stiffness ratio of 0.8. c. Designed to operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection curve over deflection range of not less than 50 percent above specified deflection. d. Designed to provide additional travel to solid of not less than 50 percent of rated deflection at rated load.
e. Selected to provide designed deflection of not less than 75 percent of specified deflection.
f. Selected to function without undue stress or overloading.

3. Seismic Snubbing Elements for Seismic Isolators:
a. Air Gap: Between 0.125 inches and 0.25 inches unless otherwise indicated. b. Points of Contact: Cushioned with resilient material, minimum 0.25 inch thick; capable of being visually inspected for damage and replaced.

C. Vibration Isolators for Non-Seismic Applications:

1. Resilient Material Isolator Pads:
a. Description: Single or multiple layer pads utilizing elastomeric (e.g. neoprene, rubber) or fiberglass isolator material.
b. Pad Thickness: As required for specified minimum static deflection; minimum 0.25 inch thickness.
c. Multiple Layer Pads: Provide bonded, galvanized sheet metal separation plate between each layer.

2. Resilient Material Isolator Mounts, Non-Seismic:
a. Description: Mounting assemblies for bolting equipment to supporting structure utilizing elastomeric (e.g. neoprene, rubber) or fiberglass isolator material; fail-safe type.

3. Open (Unhoused) Spring Isolators:
a. Description: Isolator assembly consisting of single or multiple free-standing, laterally stable steel spring(s) without a housing.
b. Bottom Load Plate: Non-skid molded elastomeric isolator material or steel with non- skid elastomeric isolator pad with provisions for bolting to supporting structure as required.
c. Furnished with integral leveling device for positioning and securing supported equipment.

4. Housed Spring Isolators:
a. Description: Isolator assembly consisting of single or multiple free-standing, laterally stable steel spring(s) within a metal housing.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical
Systems 26 05 48 - 8
b. Furnished with integral elastomeric snubbing elements, non-adjustable type, for limiting equipment movement and preventing metal-to-metal contact between housing elements.
c. Bottom Load Plate: Steel with non-skid elastomeric isolator pad with provisions for bolting to supporting structure as required.
d. Furnished with integral leveling device for positioning and securing supported equipment.

5. Restrained Spring Isolators, Non-Seismic:
a. Description: Isolator assembly consisting of single or multiple free-standing, laterally stable steel spring(s) within a metal housing designed to prevent movement of supported equipment above an adjustable vertical limit stop. b. Bottom Load Plate: Steel with non-skid elastomeric isolator pad with provisions for bolting to supporting structure as required.
c. Furnished with integral leveling device for positioning and securing supported equipment.
d. Provides constant free and operating height.

6. Resilient Material Isolator Hangers, Non-Seismic:
a. Description: Isolator assembly designed for installation in hanger rod suspension system utilizing elastomeric (e.g. neoprene, rubber) or fiberglass isolator material for the lower hanger rod connection.

7. Spring Isolator Hangers, Non-Seismic:
a. Description: Isolator assembly designed for installation in hanger rod suspension system utilizing single or multiple free-standing, laterally stable steel spring(s) in series with an elastomeric element for the lower hanger rod connection. b. Designed to accommodate misalignment of bottom hanger rod up to 30 degrees (plus/minus 15 degrees) without short circuiting of isolation.

8. Combination Resilient Material/Spring Isolator Hangers, Non-Seismic:
a. Description: Isolator assembly designed for installation in hanger rod suspension system utilizing single or multiple free-standing, laterally stable steel spring(s) for the lower hanger rod connection and elastomeric (e.g. neoprene, rubber) or fiberglass isolator material for the upper hanger rod connection.
b. Designed to accommodate misalignment of bottom hanger rod up to 30 degrees (plus/minus 15 degrees) without short circuiting of isolation.

D. Vibration Isolators for Seismic Applications:

1. Resilient Material Isolator Mounts, Seismic:
a. Description: Mounting assemblies for bolting equipment to supporting structure utilizing elastomeric (e.g. neoprene, rubber) isolator material; specifically designed and rated for seismic applications with integral snubbing in all directions.

2. Restrained Spring Isolators, Seismic:
a. Description: Isolator assembly consisting of single or multiple free-standing, laterally stable steel spring(s) in series with elastomeric (e.g. neoprene, rubber) isolator material within a metal housing designed to prevent movement of supported equipment above an adjustable vertical limit stop; specifically designed and rated for seismic applications with integral snubbing in all directions. b. Bottom Load Plate: Steel with provisions for bolting to supporting structure as required.
c. Furnished with integral leveling device for positioning and securing supported equipment.
d. Provides constant free and operating height.

3. Resilient Material Isolator Hangers, Seismic:
a. Description: Isolator assembly designed for installation in hanger rod suspension system utilizing elastomeric (e.g. neoprene, rubber) isolator material for the lower hanger rod connection; specifically designed and rated for seismic applications with vertical limit stop to prevent upward travel of hanger rod and cushion impact.

4. Spring Isolator Hangers, Seismic:

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical
Systems 26 05 48 - 9
a. Description: Isolator assembly designed for installation in hanger rod suspension system utilizing single or multiple free-standing, laterally stable steel spring(s) in series with an elastomeric element for the lower hanger rod connection; specifically designed and rated for seismic applications with vertical limit stop to prevent upward travel of hanger rod and cushion impact.
b. Designed to accommodate misalignment of bottom hanger rod up to 30 degrees (plus/minus 15 degrees) without short circuiting of isolation.

5. Combination Resilient Material/Spring Isolator Hangers, Seismic:
a. Description: Isolator assembly designed for installation in hanger rod suspension system utilizing single or multiple free-standing, laterally stable steel spring(s) for the lower hanger rod connection and elastomeric (e.g. neoprene, rubber) isolator material for the upper hanger rod connection; specifically designed and rated for seismic applications with vertical limit stop to prevent upward travel of hanger rod and cushion impact.
b. Designed to accommodate misalignment of bottom hanger rod up to 30 degrees (plus/minus 15 degrees) without short circuiting of isolation.

2.05 EXTERNAL SEISMIC SNUBBER ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturers:

1. External Seismic Snubber Assemblies:
a. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc: www.kineticsnoise.com/#sle. b. Mason Industries: www.mason-ind.com/#sle.
c. Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc: www.veco-nyc.com/#sle.

2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

3. Source Limitations: Furnish external seismic snubber assemblies and associated accessories produced by the same manufacturer as the vibration isolators and obtained from a single supplier.

B. Description: Steel snubbing assemblies designed for external attachment to both equipment and supporting structure that, as part of a complete system, restrain equipment motion in all directions during a seismic event while maintaining vibration isolation during normal operation.

C. Seismic Snubbing Elements:

1. Air Gap: Between 0.125 inches and 0.25 inches unless otherwise indicated.

2. Points of Contact: Cushioned with resilient material, minimum 0.25 inch thick; capable of being visually inspected for damage and replaced.

2.06 SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Seismic Restraint Systems:
a. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle.
b. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc: www.kineticsnoise.com/#sle. c. Mason Industries: www.mason-ind.com/#sle.

2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

3. Source Limitations: Furnish seismic restraint system components and accessories produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.

B. Description: System components and accessories specifically designed for field assembly and attachment of seismic restraints.

C. Cable Restraints:

1. Comply with ASCE 19.

2. Cables: Pre-stretched, galvanized steel wire rope with certified break strength.

3. Cable Connections: Use only swaged end fittings. Cable clips and wedge type end fittings are not permitted in accordance with ASCE 19.

4. Use protective thimbles for cable loops where potential for cable damage exists.

D. Rigid Restraints: Use MFMA-4 steel channel (strut), steel angle, or steel pipe for structural element; suitable for both compressive and tensile design loads.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive vibration isolation and/or seismic control components and associated attachments.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
A. Arrange work to accommodate tests and/or inspections performed by Special Inspection Agency employed by Owner or Architect in accordance with Section 01 45 33 and statement of special inspections as required by applicable building code.

B. Frequency of Special Inspections: Where special inspections are designated as continuous or periodic, arrange work accordingly.

1. Continuous Special Inspections: Special Inspection Agency to be present in the area where the work is being performed and observe the work at all times the work is in progress.

2. Periodic Special Inspections: Special Inspection Agency to be present in the area where work is being performed and observe the work part-time or intermittently and at the completion of the work.

C. Prior to starting work, Contractor to submit written statement of responsibility to authorities having jurisdiction and to Owner acknowledging awareness of special requirements contained in the statement of special inspections.

D. Special Inspection Agency services do not relieve Contractor from performing inspections and testing specified elsewhere.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install products in accordance with applicable requirements of NECA 1 (general workmanship).

C. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services, LLC (ICC-ES) evaluation report conditions of use where applicable.

D. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

E. Install flexible conduit and cable connections to provide sufficient slack for vibration isolation and/or seismic relative displacements as indicated or as required.

F. Vibration Isolation Systems:

1. Vibration-Isolated Equipment Support Bases:
a. Provide specified minimum clearance beneath base.

2. Spring Isolators:
a. Position equipment at operating height; provide temporary blocking as required. b. Lift equipment free of isolators prior to lateral repositioning to avoid damage to isolators.
c. Level equipment by adjusting isolators gradually in sequence to raise equipment uniformly such that excessive weight or stress is not placed on any single isolator.

3. Isolator Hangers:
a. Use precompressed isolator hangers where required to facilitate installation and prevent damage to equipment utility connection provisions. b. Locate isolator hangers at top of hanger rods in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

4. Clean debris from beneath vibration-isolated equipment that could cause short circuiting of isolation.

5. Use elastomeric grommets for attachments where required to prevent short circuiting of isolation.

6. Adjust isolators to be free of isolation short circuits during normal operation.

7. Do not overtighten fasteners such that resilient material isolator pads are compressed beyond manufacturer's maximum recommended deflection.

1. Provide specified snubbing element air gap; remove any factory-installed spacers, debris or other obstructions.

2. Use only specified components, anchorage, and hardware evaluated by seismic design.

Comply with conditions of seismic certification where applicable.

3. Where mounting hole diameter exceeds bolt diameter by more than 0.125 inch, use epoxy grout, elastomeric grommet, or welded washer to reduce clearance to 0.125 inch or less.

4. Equipment with Sheet Metal Housings:
a. Use Belleville washers to distribute stress over a larger surface area of the sheet metal connection interface as approved by manufacturer. b. Attach additional steel as approved by manufacturer where required to transfer loads to structure.
c. Where mounting surface is irregular, do not shim housing; reinforce housing with additional steel as approved by manufacturer.

5. Concrete Housekeeping Pads:
a. Size in accordance with seismic design to meet anchor requirements. b. Install pad reinforcement and doweling in accordance with seismic design to ensure integrity of pad and associated connection to slab.

6. Seismic Restraint Systems:
a. Do not attach seismic restraints and gravity supports to dissimilar parts of structure that may move differently during an earthquake.
b. Install restraints within permissible angles in accordance with seismic design. c. Install cable restraints straight between component/run and structural attachment; do not bend around other nonstructural components or structural elements. d. Install cable restraints for vibration-isolated components slightly slack to prevent short circuiting of isolation.
e. Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated using only specified clamps; do not weld stiffeners to hanger rod.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect vibration isolation and/or seismic control components for damage and defects.

C. Provide services of a manufacturer's authorized representative for vibration isolation systems and seismic controls to observe installation and assist in inspection and testing. Include manufacturer's detailed testing and inspection procedures and field reports with submittals.

D. Vibration Isolation Systems:

1. Verify isolator static deflections.

2. Verify required clearance beneath vibration-isolated equipment support bases.

3. Verify vibration isolation performance during normal operation; investigate sources of isolation short circuits.

E. Seismic Controls:

1. Verify snubbing element air gaps.

F. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective vibration isolation and/or seismic control components.

G. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions taken.

3.05 ATTACHMENTS
A. Statement of special inspections.

END OF SECTION 26 05 48
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 1
SECTION 26 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical identification requirements.

B. Identification nameplates and labels.

C. Wire and cable markers.

D. Voltage markers.

E. Underground warning tape.

F. Floor marking tape.

G. Warning signs and labels.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 09 91 13 - Exterior Painting.

B. Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting.

C. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for power conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape.

D. Section 26 05 36 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems: Additional identification requirements for cable tray systems.

E. Section 26 05 73 - Power System Studies: Arc flash hazard warning labels.

F. Section 26 23 00 - Low-Voltage Switchgear: Factory-installed mimic bus.

G. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices - Lutron: Device and wallplate finishes; factory pre-marked wallplates.

H. Section 26 31 00 - Photovoltaic Collectors: Additional identification requirements for photovoltaic systems.

I. Section 27 10 00 - Structured Cabling: Identification for communications cabling and devices.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI Z535.2 - American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs; 2011 (Reaffirmed 2017).

B. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011 (Reaffirmed 2017).

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

D. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace; 2024.

E. UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified prior to fabrication of identification products.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended ceilings, until identification products have been installed.

2. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide schedule of items to be identified indicating proposed designations, materials, legends, and formats.

D. Samples:

1. Identification Nameplates: One of each type and color specified.

2. Warning Signs and Labels: One of each type and legend specified.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 2
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of product.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of CEC.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Existing Work: Unless specifically excluded, identify existing elements to remain that are not already identified in accordance with specified requirements.

B. Identification for Equipment:

1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components. a. Switchgear:
1) Identify ampere rating.
2) Identify voltage and phase.
3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment.
4) Use identification nameplate to identify main and tie devices. 5) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device.

Do not identify spares and spaces.
6) See Section 26 23 00 for factory-installed mimic bus. b. Switchboards:
1) Identify ampere rating.
2) Identify voltage and phase.
3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment.
4) Use identification nameplate to identify main overcurrent protective device. 5) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device.

Do not identify spares and spaces.
c. Motor Control Centers:
1) Identify ampere rating.
2) Identify voltage and phase.
3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment.
4) Use identification nameplate to identify main overcurrent protective device. 5) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device.

Do not identify spares and spaces.
d. Panelboards:
1) Identify ampere rating.
2) Identify voltage and phase.
3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment.
4) Identify main overcurrent protective device. Use identification label for panelboards with a door. For power distribution panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate.
5) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a door. Identify spares and spaces using pencil.
6) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device. Do not identify spares and spaces.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 3
e. Transformers:
1) Identify kVA rating.
2) Identify voltage and phase for primary and secondary. 3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment.
4) Identify load(s) served. Include location when not within sight of equipment. f. Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers:
1) Identify voltage and phase.
2) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment.
3) Identify load(s) served. Include location when not within sight of equipment. g. Busway:
1) Identify ampere rating.
2) Identify voltage and phase.
3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment.
4) Provide identification at maximum intervals of 40 feet. 5) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each plug-in unit.

Include location when not within sight of equipment.
h. Time Switches:
1) Identify load(s) served and associated circuits controlled. Include location. i. Enclosed Contactors:
1) Identify ampere rating.
2) Identify voltage and phase.
3) Identify configuration, e.g., E.O.E.H. (electrically operated, electrically held) or E.O.M.H. (electrically operated, mechanically held).
4) Identify coil voltage.
5) Identify load(s) and associated circuits controlled. Include location. j. Centralized Emergency Lighting Inverters:
1) Identify input and output voltage and phase.
2) Identify power source and circuit number for normal power source. Include location when not within sight of equipment.
3) Identify load(s) served. Include location.
k. Transfer Switches:
1) Identify voltage and phase.
2) Identify power source and circuit number for both normal power source and standby power source. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 3) Identify load(s) served. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 4) Identify short circuit current rating based on the specific overcurrent protective device type and settings protecting the transfer switch. l. Electricity Meters:
1) Identify load(s) metered.

2. Service Equipment:
a. Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means. b. For buildings or structures supplied by more than one service, or any combination of branch circuits, feeders, and services, use identification nameplate or means of identification acceptable to authority having jurisdiction at each service disconnecting means to identify all other services, feeders, and branch circuits supplying that building or structure. Verify format and descriptions with authority having jurisdiction.

3. Emergency System Equipment:
a. Use identification nameplate or voltage marker to identify emergency system equipment in accordance with CEC.
b. Use identification nameplate at each piece of service equipment to identify type and location of on-site emergency power sources.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 4
c. Use identification nameplate to identify emergency operating instructions for emergency system equipment.

4. Use voltage marker to identify highest voltage present for each piece of electrical equipment.

5. Use identification nameplate to identify equipment utilizing series ratings, where permitted, in accordance with CEC.

6. Use identification nameplate to identify switchboards and panelboards utilizing a high leg delta system in accordance with CEC.

7. Use identification nameplate to identify disconnect location for equipment with remote disconnecting means.

8. Use identification label or handwritten text using indelible marker on inside of door at each fused switch to identify required NEMA fuse class and size.

9. Use identification label or handwritten text using indelible marker on inside of door at each motor controller to identify nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, voltage, and phase of motor(s) controlled.

10. Use identification label to identify overcurrent protective devices for branch circuits serving fire alarm circuits. Identify with text "FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT".

11. Use field-painted floor markings, floor marking tape, or warning labels to identify required equipment working clearances where indicated or where required by the authority having jurisdiction.
a. Field-Painted Floor Markings: Alternating black and white stripes, 3 inches wide, painted in accordance with Section 09 91 23 and 09 91 13.

12. Available Fault Current Documentation: Use identification label to identify the available fault current and date calculations were performed at locations requiring documentation by NFPA 70 including but not limited to the following.
a. Service equipment.
b. Elevator control panels.
c. Industrial machinery.

13. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Comply with Section 26 05 73.

14. Use warning signs to identify electrical hazards for entrances to all rooms and other guarded locations that contain exposed live parts operating at 600 V nominal or less with the word message "DANGER; Electrical hazard; Authorized personnel only" or approved equivalent.

15. Use warning signs to identify electrical hazards for entrances to all buildings, vaults, rooms, or enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 V nominal with the word message "DANGER; HIGH VOLTAGE; KEEP OUT".

16. Use warning labels to identify electrical hazards for equipment, compartments, and enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 V nominal with the word message "DANGER; HIGH VOLTAGE; KEEP OUT".

17. Use warning labels, identification nameplates, or identification labels to identify electrical hazards for equipment where multiple power sources are present with the word message "DANGER; Hazardous voltage; Multiple power sources may be present; Disconnect all electric power including remote disconnects before servicing" or approved equivalent.

C. Identification for Conductors and Cables:

1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 05 19.

2. Identification for Communications Conductors and Cables: Comply with Section 27 10 00.

3. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system.

4. Use wire and cable markers to identify circuit number or other designation indicated for power, control, and instrumentation conductors and cables at the following locations:
a. At each source and load connection.
b. Within boxes when more than one circuit is present.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 5
c. Within equipment enclosures when conductors and cables enter or leave the enclosure.
d. In cable tray, at maximum intervals of 20 feet.

5. Use wire and cable markers to identify connected grounding electrode system components for grounding electrode conductors.

6. Use underground warning tape to identify direct buried cables.

D. Identification for Raceways:

1. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present for accessible conduits at maximum intervals of 20 feet.

2. Use voltage markers or color-coded bands to identify systems other than normal power system for accessible conduits at maximum intervals of 20 feet. a. Color-Coded Bands: Use field-painting or vinyl color coding electrical tape to mark bands 3 inches wide.
1) Color Code:
(a) Emergency Power System: Red.
2) Field-Painting: Comply with Section 09 91 23 and 09 91 13. 3) Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Comply with Section 26 05 19.

3. Use identification labels, handwritten text using indelible marker, or plastic marker tags to identify circuits enclosed for accessible conduits at wall penetrations, at floor penetrations, at roof penetrations, and at equipment terminations when source is not within sight.

4. Use identification labels, handwritten text using indelible marker, or plastic marker tags to identify spare conduits at each end. Identify purpose and termination location.

5. Use underground warning tape to identify underground raceways.

6. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present for wireways at maximum intervals of 20 feet.

E. Identification for Cable Tray: Comply with Section 26 05 36.

F. Identification for Boxes:

1. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present.

2. Use voltage markers or color coded boxes to identify systems other than normal power system.
a. Color-Coded Boxes: Field-painted in accordance with Section 09 91 23 and 09 91 13 per the same color code used for raceways.

3. Use identification labels or handwritten text using indelible marker to identify circuits enclosed.
a. For exposed boxes in public areas, use only identification labels.

4. Use warning labels to identify electrical hazards for boxes containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 V nominal with the word message "DANGER; HIGH VOLTAGE; KEEP OUT".

G. Identification for Devices:

1. Identification for Communications Devices: Comply with Section 27 10 00.

2. Wiring Device and Wallplate Finishes: Comply with Section 26 27 26.

3. Factory Pre-Marked Wallplates: Comply with Section 26 27 26.

4. Use identification label to identify fire alarm system devices. a. For devices concealed above suspended ceilings, provide additional identification on ceiling tile below device location.

5. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify serving branch circuit for all receptacles.
a. For receptacles in public areas or in areas as directed by Architect, provide identification on inside surface of wallplate.

6. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify load controlled for wall-mounted control devices controlling loads that are not visible from the control location and for multiple wall-mounted control devices installed at one location.

7. Use identification label to identify receptacles protected by upstream GFI protection, where permitted.

1. Use permanent red dot on luminaire frame to identify luminaires connected to emergency power system.

I. Identification for Photovoltaic Systems: Comply with Section 26 31 00

2.02 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A. Identification Nameplates:

1. Manufacturers:
a. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com/#sle.
b. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co{CH#275749}: www.kolbipipemarkers.com/#sle. c. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/#sle.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Materials:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates. b. Outdoor Locations: Use plastic, stainless steel, or aluminum nameplates suitable for exterior use.

3. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically non- conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved text.

4. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched text.

5. Aluminum Nameplates: Anodized; minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser- etched text.

6. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes.

B. Identification Labels:

1. Manufacturers:
a. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com/#sle.
b. Brother International Corporation: www.brother-usa.com/#sle. c. Panduit Corp: www.panduit.com/#sle.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant.
a. Use only for indoor locations.

3. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless otherwise indicated.

C. Format for Equipment Identification:

1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches.

2. Legend:
a. System designation where applicable:
1) Emergency Power System: Identify with text "EMERGENCY". 2) Fire Alarm System: Identify with text "FIRE ALARM". b. Equipment designation or other approved description. c. Other information as indicated.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

4. Minimum Text Height:
a. System Designation: 1 inch.
b. Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch.
c. Other Information: 1/4 inch.
d. Exception: Provide minimum text height of 1 inch for equipment located more than 10 feet above floor or working platform.

5. Color:
a. Normal Power System: White text on black background. b. Emergency Power System: White text on red background. c. Fire Alarm System: White text on red background.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 7
D. Format for General Information and Operating Instructions:

1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches.

2. Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper and safe operation and maintenance.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

4. Minimum Text Height: 1/4 inch.

5. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated. a. Exceptions:
1) Provide white text on red background for general information or operational instructions for emergency systems.
2) Provide white text on red background for general information or operational instructions for fire alarm systems.

E. Format for Caution and Warning Messages:

1. Minimum Size: 2 inches by 4 inches.

2. Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper and safe operation and maintenance.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

4. Minimum Text Height: 1/2 inch.

5. Color: Black text on yellow background unless otherwise indicated.

F. Format for Receptacle Identification:

1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches.

2. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch.

5. Color: Black text on clear background.

G. Format for Control Device Identification:

1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches.

2. Legend: Load controlled or other designation indicated.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch.

5. Color: Black text on clear background.

H. Format for Fire Alarm Device Identification:

1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches.

2. Legend: Designation indicated and device zone or address.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch.

5. Color: Red text on white background.

2.03 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com/#sle.

2. HellermannTyton: www.hellermanntyton.com/#sle.

3. Panduit Corp: www.panduit.com/#sle.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip-on, or vinyl split sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified.

C. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable ties.

D. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.

E. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

F. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch.

G. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.

2.04 VOLTAGE MARKERS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com/#sle.

2. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com/#sle.

3. 4. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/#sle.

B. Markers for Conduits: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl, self-adhesive vinyl cloth, or vinyl snap-around type markers.

C. Markers for Boxes and Equipment Enclosures: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl or self-adhesive vinyl cloth type markers.

D. Minimum Size:

1. Markers for Equipment: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches.

2. Markers for Conduits: As recommended by manufacturer for conduit size to be identified.

3. Markers for Pull Boxes: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches.

4. Markers for Junction Boxes: 1/2 by 2 1/4 inches.

E. Legend:

1. Markers for Voltage Identification: Highest voltage present.

2. Markers for System Identification:
a. Emergency Power System: Text "EMERGENCY".

F. Color: Black text on orange background unless otherwise indicated.

2.05 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Manufacturers:

1. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com/#sle.

2. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com/#sle.

3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/#sle.

B. Materials: Use non-detectable type polyethylene tape suitable for direct burial, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Exception: Use foil-backed detectable type tape where required by serving utility or where directed by Owner.

C. Non-detectable Type Tape: 6 inches wide, with minimum thickness of 4 mil.

D. Foil-backed Detectable Type Tape: 3 inches wide, with minimum thickness of 5 mil, unless otherwise required for proper detection.

E. Legend: Type of service, continuously repeated over full length of tape.

F. Color:

1. Tape for Buried Power Lines: Black text on red background.

2. Tape for Buried Communication, Alarm, and Signal Lines: Black text on orange background.

2.06 FLOOR MARKING TAPE
A. Manufacturers:

1. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com/#sle.

2. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com/#sle.

3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/#sle.

B. Floor Marking Tape for Equipment Working Clearance Identification: Self-adhesive vinyl or polyester tape with overlaminate, 3 inches wide, with alternating black and white stripes.

2.07 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com/#sle.

2. Clarion Safety Systems, LLC: www.clarionsafety.com/#sle.

3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/#sle.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 9
B. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable.

C. Warning Signs:

1. Materials:
a. Indoor Dry, Clean Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid plastic or self-adhesive vinyl signs.
b. Outdoor Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid aluminum signs.

2. Rigid Signs: Provide four mounting holes at corners for mechanical fasteners.

3. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated.

D. Warning Labels:

1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or self- adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced using materials recognized to UL 969.

2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessories recommended by label manufacturer.

3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:

1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.

2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.

3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear access.

4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.

5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device.

6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.

7. Conduits: Legible from the floor.

8. Boxes: Outside face of cover.

9. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.

10. Devices: Outside face of cover.

C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.

D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement.

E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and edges properly sealed.

F. Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench at 3 inches below finished grade.

G. Secure rigid signs using stainless steel screws.

H. Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs of improper adhesion.

END OF SECTION 26 05 53
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Power System Studies 26 05 73 - 1
SECTION 26 05 73

POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Short-circuit study.

B. Protective device coordination study.

C. Arc flash and shock risk assessment.

1. Includes arc flash hazard warning labels.

D. Criteria for the selection and adjustment of equipment and associated protective devices not specified in this section, as determined by studies to be performed.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for arc flash hazard warning labels.

B. Section 26 11 16 - Secondary Unit Substations.

C. Section 26 13 00 - Medium-Voltage Switchgear.

D. Section 26 13 21 - Air Interrupter Switches.

E. Section 26 18 39 - Medium-Voltage Motor Controllers.

F. Section 26 21 00 - Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance.

1. Includes Utility Company contact information.

G. Section 26 23 00 - Low-Voltage Switchgear.

H. Section 26 24 13 - Switchboards.

I. Section 26 24 16 - Panelboards.

J. Section 26 24 19 - Motor-Control Centers.

K. Section 26 25 13 - Low-Voltage Busways.

L. Section 26 28 13 - Fuses.

M. Section 26 28 16.13 - Enclosed Circuit Breakers.

N. Section 26 28 16.16 - Enclosed Switches.

O. Section 26 29 13 - Enclosed Controllers.

P. Section 26 33 23 - Central Battery Equipment.

Q. Section 26 35 33.16 - Low-Voltage Power Factor Correction Equipment.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011 (Reaffirmed 2017).

B. IEEE 141 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants; 1993 (Reaffirmed 1999).

C. IEEE 242 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems; 2001, with Errata (2003).

D. IEEE 399 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power Systems Analysis; 1997.

E. IEEE 551 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Calculating Short-Circuit Currents in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems; 2006.

F. IEEE 1584 - IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations; 2018, with Errata (2019).

G. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2021.

H. NETA ATS - Standard For Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Equipment And Systems; 2021.

I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

J. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace; 2024.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Existing Installations: Coordinate with equipment manufacturer(s) to obtain data necessary for completion of studies.

2. Coordinate the work to provide equipment and associated protective devices complying with criteria for selection and adjustment, as determined by studies to be performed.

3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Pre-Study Meeting: Conduct meeting with Owner to discuss system operating modes and conditions to be considered in studies.

C. Sequencing:

1. Submit study reports prior to or concurrent with product submittals.

2. Do not order equipment until matching study reports and product submittals have both been evaluated by Architect.

3. Verify naming convention for equipment identification prior to creation of final drawings, reports, and arc flash hazard warning labels (where applicable).

D. Scheduling:

1. Arrange access to existing facility for data collection with Owner.

2. Where work of this section involves interruption of existing electrical service, arrange service interruption with Owner.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Study preparer's qualifications.

C. Field testing agency's qualifications.

D. Study reports, stamped or sealed and signed by study preparer.

E. Product Data: In addition to submittal requirements specified in other sections, include manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for equipment and protective devices indicating information relevant to studies.

1. Include characteristic time-current trip curves for protective devices.

2. Include impedance data for busway.

3. Include impedance data for engine generators.

4. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or, where acceptable, series rated systems.

5. Include documentation of listed series ratings upon request.

6. Identify modifications made in accordance with studies that:
a. Can be made at no additional cost to Owner.
b. As submitted will involve a change to the contract sum.

F. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Label Samples: One of each type and legend specified.

G. Site-specific arc flash hazard warning labels.

H. Field quality control reports.

I. Certification that field adjustable protective devices have been set in accordance with requirements of studies.

J. Project Record Documents: Revise studies as required to reflect as-built conditions.

1. Include hard copies with operation and maintenance data submittals.

2. Include computer software files used to prepare studies with file name(s) cross-referenced to specific pieces of equipment and systems.

1.06 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
A. Scope of Studies:

1. Perform analysis of new electrical distribution system as indicated on drawings.

2. Except where study descriptions below indicate exclusions, analyze system at each bus from primary protective devices of utility source down to each piece of equipment involved, including parts of system affecting calculations being performed (e.g. fault current contribution from motors).

3. Include in analysis alternate sources and operating modes (including known future configurations) to determine worst case conditions.

B. General Study Requirements:

1. Comply with CEC.

2. Perform studies utilizing computer software complying with specified requirements; manual calculations are not permitted.

C. Data Collection:

1. Compile information on project-specific characteristics of actual installed equipment, protective devices, feeders, etc. as necessary to develop single-line diagram of electrical distribution system and associated input data for use in system modeling. a. Utility Source Data: Include primary voltage, maximum and minimum three-phase and line-to-ground fault currents, impedance, X/R ratio, and primary protective device information.
1) Obtain up-to-date information from Utility Company.
2) Utility Company: See Section 26 21 00 for Utility Company contact information. b. Generators: Include manufacturer/model, kW and voltage ratings, and impedance. c. Motors: Include manufacturer/model, type (e.g. induction, synchronous), horsepower rating, voltage rating, full load amps, and locked rotor current or NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.
d. Transformers: Include primary and secondary voltage ratings, kVA rating, winding configuration, percent impedance, and X/R ratio.
e. Protective Devices:
1) Circuit Breakers: Include manufacturer/model, type (e.g. thermal magnetic, electronic trip), frame size, trip rating, voltage rating, interrupting rating, available field-adjustable trip response settings, and features (e.g. zone selective interlocking).
2) Fuses: Include manufacturer/model, type/class (e.g. Class J), size/rating, and speed (e.g. time delay, fast acting).
f. Protective Relays: Include manufacturer/model, type, settings, current/potential transformer ratio, and associated protective device.
g. Conductors: Include feeder size, material (e.g. copper, aluminum), insulation type, voltage rating, number per phase, raceway type, and actual length.

2. Existing Installations:
a. Provide the services of field testing agency or equipment manufacturer's representative to perform field data collection.
b. Collect data on existing electrical distribution system necessary for completion of studies, including field verification of available existing data (e.g. construction documents, previous studies). Include actual settings for field-adjustable devices. c. Available Existing Data:

D. Short-Circuit Study:

1. Comply with IEEE 551 and applicable portions of IEEE 141, IEEE 242, and IEEE 399.

2. For purposes of determining equipment short circuit current ratings, consider conditions that may result in maximum available fault current, including but not limited to:
a. Maximum utility fault currents.
b. Maximum motor contribution.
c. Known operating modes (e.g. utility as source, generator as source, utility/generator in parallel, bus tie breaker open/close positions).

3. For each bus location, calculate the maximum available three-phase bolted symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. For grounded systems, also calculate the maximum available line-to-ground bolted fault currents.

E. Protective Device Coordination Study:

1. Comply with applicable portions of IEEE 242 and IEEE 399.

2. Analyze alternate scenarios considering known operating modes (e.g. utility as source, generator as source, utility/generator in parallel, bus tie breaker open/close positions).

3. Analyze protective devices and associated settings for suitable margins between time- current curves to achieve full selective coordination while providing adequate protection for equipment and conductors.

F. Arc Flash and Shock Risk Assessment:

1. Comply with NFPA 70E.

2. Perform incident energy and arc flash boundary calculations in accordance with IEEE 1584 (as referenced in NFPA 70E Annex D), where applicable. a. To clarify IEEE 1584 statement that "equipment below 240 V need not be considered unless it involves at least one 125 kVA or larger low-impedance transformer in its immediate power supply" for purposes of studies, study preparer to include equipment rated less than 240 V fed by transformers less than 125 kVA in calculations.
b. Where reasonable, study preparer may assume a maximum clearing time of two seconds in accordance with IEEE 1584, provided that the conditions are such that a worker's egress from an arc flash event would not be inhibited. c. For single-phase systems, study preparer to perform calculations assuming three- phase system in accordance with IEEE 1584 yielding conservative results.

3. For equipment with main devices mounted in separate compartmentalized sections, perform calculations on both the line and load side of the main device.

4. Analyze alternate scenarios considering conditions that may result in maximum incident energy, including but not limited to:
a. Maximum and minimum utility fault currents.
b. Maximum and minimum motor contribution.
c. Known operating modes (e.g. utility as source, generator as source, utility/generator in parallel, bus tie breaker open/close positions).

G. Study Reports:

1. General Requirements:
a. Identify date of study and study preparer.
b. Identify study methodology and software product(s) used. c. Identify scope of studies, assumptions made, implications of possible alternate scenarios, and any exclusions from studies.
d. Identify base used for per unit values.
e. Include single-line diagram and associated input data used for studies; identify buses on single-line diagram as referenced in reports, and indicate bus voltage. f. Include conclusions and recommendations.

2. Short-Circuit Study:
a. For each scenario, identify at each bus location:
1) Calculated maximum available symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents (both three-phase and line-to-ground where applicable). 2) Fault point X/R ratio.
3) Associated equipment short circuit current ratings.
b. Identify locations where the available fault current exceeds the equipment short circuit current rating, along with recommendations.

3. Protective Device Coordination Study:
a. For each scenario, include time-current coordination curves plotted on log-log scale graphs.
b. For each graph include (where applicable):
1) Partial single-line diagram identifying the portion of the system illustrated. 2) Protective Devices: Time-current curves with applicable tolerance bands for each protective device in series back to the source, plotted up to the maximum available fault current at the associated bus.
3) Conductors: Damage curves.
4) Transformers: Inrush points and damage curves.
5) Generators: Full load current, overload curves, decrement curves, and short circuit withstand points.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Power System Studies 26 05 73 - 5
6) Motors: Full load current, starting curves, and damage curves. 7) Capacitors: Full load current and damage curves.
c. For each protective device, identify fixed and adjustable characteristics with available ranges and recommended settings.
1) Circuit Breakers: Include long time pickup and delay, short time pickup and delay, and instantaneous pickup.
2) Include ground fault pickup and delay.
3) Include fuse ratings.
4) Protective Relays: Include current/potential transformer ratios, tap, time dial, and instantaneous pickup.
d. Identify cases where either full selective coordination or adequate protection is not achieved, along with recommendations.

4. Arc Flash and Shock Risk Assessment:
a. For each scenario, identify at each bus location:
1) Calculated incident energy and associated working distance. 2) Calculated arc flash boundary.
3) Bolted fault current.
4) Arcing fault current.
5) Clearing time.
6) Arc gap distance.
b. For purposes of producing arc flash hazard warning labels, summarize the maximum incident energy and associated data reflecting the worst case condition of all scenarios at each bus location.
c. Identify locations where the calculated maximum incident energy exceeds 40 calories per sq cm.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Study Preparer Qualifications: Professional electrical engineer licensed in the State in which the Project is located and with minimum five years experience in the preparation of studies of similar type and complexity using specified computer software.

1. Study preparer may be employed by the manufacturer of the electrical distribution equipment.

2. Study preparer may be employed by field testing agency.

3. Acceptable Study Preparers:

B. Field Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent testing organization specializing in testing, analysis, and maintenance of electrical systems with minimum five years experience; NETA Accredited Company.

1. Field Supervisor: Certified electrical testing technician; NETA ETT Level III.

C. Computer Software for Study Preparation: Use the latest edition of commercially available software utilizing specified methodologies.

1. Acceptable Software Products:
a. EasyPower LLC: www.easypower.com/#sle.
b. ETAP/Operation Technology, Inc: www.etap.com/#sle.
c. Power Analytics Corporation: www.poweranalytics.com/#sle. d. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc: www.skm.com/#sle.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ARC FLASH HAZARD WARNING LABELS
A. Provide warning labels complying with ANSI Z535.4 to identify arc flash hazards for each work location analyzed by the arc flash and shock risk assessment.

1. Materials: Comply with Section 26 05 53.

2. Legend: Provide custom legend in accordance with NFPA 70E based on equipment- specific data as determined by arc flash and shock risk assessment. a. Include orange header that reads "WARNING" where calculated incident energy is less than 40 calories per square cm.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Power System Studies 26 05 73 - 6
b. Include red header that reads "DANGER" where calculated incident energy is 40 calories per square cm or greater.
c. Include the text "Arc Flash and Shock Hazard; Appropriate PPE Required" or approved equivalent.
d. Include the following information:
1) Arc flash boundary.
2) Available incident energy and corresponding working distance. 3) Site-specific PPE (personnel protective equipment) requirements. 4) Nominal system voltage.
5) Limited approach boundary.
6) Restricted approach boundary.
7) Equipment identification.
8) Date calculations were performed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install arc flash warning labels in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Provide the services of field testing agency or equipment manufacturer's representative to perform inspection, testing, and adjusting.

C. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

D. Adjust equipment and protective devices for compliance with studies and recommended settings.

E. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from studies. Obtain direction before proceeding.

F. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results, and final adjusted settings.

3.03 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.

B. See Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.

C. Training: Include as part of the base bid training for Owner's personnel on electrical safety pertaining to arc flash and shock hazards.

1. Use site-specific arc flash and shock risk assessment report as training reference, supplemented with additional training materials as required.

2. Provide minimum of eight hours of training.

3. Instructor: Representative of entity performing study.

4. Location: At project site.

3.04 ATTACHMENTS
A. Previous studies.

B. Existing drawings.

END OF SECTION 26 05 73
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Wiring Connections 26 05 83 - 1
SECTION 26 05 83

WIRING CONNECTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical connections to equipment.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.

B. Section 26 05 33.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 05 33.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices.

E. Section 26 28 16.16 - Enclosed Switches.

F. Section 26 29 13 - Enclosed Controllers.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2020).

B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications; 2021.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.

2. Determine connection locations and requirements.

B. Sequencing:

1. Install rough-in of electrical connections before installation of equipment is required.

2. Make electrical connections before required start-up of equipment.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer’s catalog information showing dimensions, configurations, and construction.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of CEC.

B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment.

1. Colors: Conform to NEMA WD 1.

2. Cord Construction: CEC, Type SO, multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.

3. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection.

B. Disconnect Switches: As specified in Section 26 28 16.16 and in individual equipment sections.

C. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 26 27 26.

D. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 26 05 33.13.

E. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 26 05 19.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.

3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.

B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.

C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered.

D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.

E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.

F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes.

G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements.

H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.

I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements.

END OF SECTION 26 05 83
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 1
SECTION 26 09 23

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Occupancy sensors.

B. Outdoor motion sensors.

C. Time switches.

D. In-wall time switches.

E. In-wall interval timers.

F. Outdoor photo controls.

G. Daylighting controls.

H. Lighting contactors.

I. Control accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems C. Section 26 05 33.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

E. Section 26 05 73 - Power System Studies.

F. Section 26 09 18 - Remote Control Switching Devices: Remotely controlled devices for lighting control, including networked lighting controls, programmable relay panels, and remote control switching relays.

G. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Devices for manual control of lighting, including wall switches.

1. Includes finish requirements for wall controls specified in this section.

2. Includes accessory receptacles, switches, dimmers and wall plates, to match lighting controls specified in this section.

H. Section 26 28 13 - Fuses.

I. Section 26 29 13 - Enclosed Controllers : General purpose contactors.

J. Section 26 51 00 - Interior Lighting.

K. Section 26 55 61 - Theatrical Lighting: Controls for stage lighting units.

L. Section 26 56 00 - Exterior Lighting.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 47 CFR 15 - Radio Frequency Devices; current edition.

B. ANSI C136.10 - American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment - Locking-Type Photocontrol Devices and Mating Receptacles - Physical and Electrical Interchangeability and Testing; 2023.

C. ANSI C136.24 - American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment - Nonlocking (Button) Type Photocontrols; 2020.

D. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

E. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2016.

F. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2020.

G. NEMA 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic Drivers and Discharge Ballasts; 2023.

H. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts; 2008 (Reaffirmed 2020).

I. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices; 2017.

J. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures; 1993 (Reaffirmed 2016).

K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

L. UL 773 - Plug-in, Locking Type Photocontrols for Use with Area Lighting; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

N. UL 916 - Energy Management Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

O. UL 917 - Clock-Operated Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 1472 - Solid-State Dimming Controls; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Q. UL 60947-1 - Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 1: General Rules; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

R. UL 60947-4-1 - Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 4-1: Contactors and Motor- starters - Electromechanical Contactors and Motor-starters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the placement of lighting control devices with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others.

2. Coordinate the placement of wall switch occupancy sensors with actual installed door swings.

3. Coordinate the placement of occupancy sensors with millwork, furniture, equipment or other potential obstructions to motion detection coverage installed under other sections or by others.

4. Coordinate the placement of photo sensors for daylighting controls with windows, skylights, and luminaires to achieve optimum operation. Coordinate placement with ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions to light level measurement installed under other sections or by others.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install lighting control devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors, service condition requirements, and installed features.

1. Occupancy Sensors: Include detailed motion detection coverage range diagrams.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Occupancy Sensors: Provide lighting plan indicating location, model number, and orientation of each occupancy sensor and associated system component.

2. Daylighting Controls: Provide lighting plan indicating location, model number, and orientation of each photo sensor and associated system component.

D. Field Quality Control Reports.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on device programming and setup.

G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

2. Extra Locking Receptacle-Mounted Outdoor Photo Controls: Five percent of total quantity installed for each type, but not less than two of each type.

3. Indicating Lights: Two of each different type.

H. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations and settings for lighting control devices.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Store products in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions until ready for installation.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation.

1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for all occupancy sensors.

C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for utility grade locking receptacle-mounted outdoor photo controls.

D. Provide two year manufacturer warranty for all daylighting controls.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, wiring, connectors, hardware, components, accessories, etc. as required for a complete operating system.

C. Products for Switching of Electronic Ballasts/Drivers: Tested and rated to be suitable for peak inrush currents specified in NEMA 410.

2.02 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle.

2. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com/#sle.

3. Sensor Switch Inc: www.sensorswitch.com/#sle.

4. WattStopper: www.wattstopper.com/#sle.

5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

6. Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.

B. All Occupancy Sensors:

1. Description: Factory-assembled commercial specification grade devices for indoor use capable of sensing both major motion, such as walking, and minor motion, such as small desktop level movements, according to published coverage areas, for automatic control of load indicated.

2. Sensor Technology:
a. Passive Infrared (PIR) Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy by sensing movement of thermal energy between zones.
b. Ultrasonic Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy by sensing frequency shifts in emitted and reflected inaudible sound waves.
c. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy using a combination of both passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies.
d. Passive Infrared/Acoustic Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy using a combination of both passive infrared and audible sound sensing technologies.

3. Provide LED to visually indicate motion detection with separate color LEDs for each sensor type in dual technology units.

4. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, occupancy sensor to turn load on when occupant presence is detected and to turn load off when no occupant presence is detected during an adjustable turn-off delay time interval.

5. Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors: Field configurable turn-on and hold-on activation with settings for activation by either or both sensing technologies.

6. Passive Infrared Lens Field of View: Field customizable by addition of factory masking material, adjustment of integral blinders, or similar means to block motion detection in selected areas.

7. Turn-Off Delay: Field adjustable, with time delay settings up to 30 minutes.

8. Sensitivity: Field adjustable.

9. Adaptive Technology: Field selectable; capable of self-adjusting sensitivity and time delay according to conditions.

10. Integral Photocell: For field selectable and adjustable inhibition of automatic turn-on of load when ambient lighting is above the selected level.

11. Compatibility (Non-Dimming Sensors): Suitable for controlling incandescent lighting, low- voltage lighting with electronic and magnetic transformers, fluorescent lighting with electronic and magnetic ballasts, and fractional motor loads, with no minimum load requirements.

12. Load Rating for Line Voltage Occupancy Sensors: As required to control the load indicated on drawings.

13. Isolated Relay for Low Voltage Occupancy Sensors: SPDT dry contacts, ratings as required for interface with system indicated.

14. Where wired sensors are indicated, wireless sensors are acceptable provided that all components and wiring modifications necessary for proper operation are included.

15. Wireless Sensors:
a. RF Range: 30 feet through typical construction materials. b. Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI) Limits:

Comply with FCC requirements of 47 CFR 15, for Class B application. c. Power: Battery-operated with minimum ten-year battery life.

C. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors:

1. All Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors:
a. Description: Occupancy sensors designed for installation in standard wall box at standard wall switch mounting height with a field of view of 180 degrees, integrated manual control capability, and no leakage current to load in off mode. b. Unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load indicated on drawings, provide line voltage units with self-contained relay.
c. Where indicated, provide two-circuit units for control of two separate lighting loads, with separate manual controls and separately programmable operation for each load. d. Operation: Field selectable to operate either as occupancy sensor (automatic on/off) or as vacancy sensor (manual-on/automatic off).
e. Manual-Off Override Control: When used to turn off load while in automatic-on mode, unit to revert back to automatic mode after no occupant presence is detected during the delayed-off time interval.
f. Provide selectable audible alert to notify occupant of impending load turn-off. g. Finish: Match finishes specified for wiring devices in Section 26 27 26, unless otherwise indicated.
h. Provide vandal resistant lenses for passive infrared (PIR) and dual technology wall switch occupancy sensors where indicated.

2. Passive Infrared (PIR) Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 900 square feet.

D. Wall Dimmer Occupancy Sensors:

1. General Requirements:

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 5
a. Description: Occupancy sensors designed for installation in standard wall box at standard wall switch mounting height with a field of view of 180 degrees, integrated dimming control capability , and no leakage current to load in off mode. b. Operation: Field selectable to operate either as occupancy sensor (automatic on/off) or as vacancy sensor (manual-on/automatic off).
c. Manual-Off Override Control Capability: When used to turn off load while in automatic-on mode, unit to revert back to automatic mode after no occupant presence is detected during the delayed-off time interval. d. Dimmer: Solid-state with continuous full-range even control following square law dimming curve, integral radio frequency interference filtering, power failure preset memory, air gap switch accessible without removing wall plate, and listed as complying with UL 1472; type and rating suitable for load controlled. e. Provide field adjustable dimming preset for occupied state. f. Provide fade-to-off operation to notify occupant of impending load turn-off. g. Finish: Match finishes specified for wiring devices in Section 26 27 26, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Passive Infrared (PIR) Wall Dimmer Occupancy Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 900 square feet.
a. Products:
1) Lutron Maestro C.L Sensor Dimmer Series; www.lutron.com/#sle. 2) Lutron Maestro Occupancy Sensor Dimmer Series; www.lutron.com/#sle. 3) Lutron Maestro 0-10V Dimmer Sensor Series; www.lutron.com/#sle. 4) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

E. Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:

1. All Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:
a. Description: Low profile occupancy sensors designed for ceiling installation. b. Unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load indicated on drawings, provide low voltage units, for use with separate compatible accessory power packs. c. Provide field selectable setting for disabling LED motion detector visual indicator. d. Occupancy sensor to be field selectable as either manual-on/automatic-off or automatic on/off.
e. Finish: White unless otherwise indicated.

2. Passive Infrared (PIR) Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:
a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 450 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees. 1) Products:
(a) Lutron LOS-CIR Series; www.lutron.com/#sle.
(b) Lutron Radio Powr Savr Wireless Sensors; www.lutron.com/#sle. b. Extended Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 1,200 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees. 1) Products:

3. Ultrasonic Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:
a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 500 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees. 1) Products:
(a) Lutron LOS-CUS Series; www.lutron.com/#sle.
b. Medium Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 1,000 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees. 1) Products:
(a) Lutron LOS-CUS Series; www.lutron.com/#sle.
c. Extended Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 2,000 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet.
1) Products:
(a) Lutron LOS-CUS Series; www.lutron.com/#sle.

4. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:
a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 450 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees. 1) Products:
(a) Lutron LOS-CDT Series; www.lutron.com/#sle.
b. Extended Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 1,200 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees. 1) Products:
(a) Lutron LOS-CDT Series; www.lutron.com/#sle.

5. Passive Infrared/Acoustic Dual Technology Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:
a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 450 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees. b. Extended Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 1,200 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet.

F. Directional Occupancy Sensors:

1. All Directional Occupancy Sensors: Designed for wall or ceiling mounting, with integral swivel for field adjustment of motion detection coverage. a. Unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load indicated on drawings, provide low voltage units, for use with separate compatible accessory power packs. b. Provide field selectable setting for disabling LED motion detector visual indicator. c. Finish: White unless otherwise indicated.

2. Passive Infrared (PIR) Directional Occupancy Sensors:
a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within a distance of 40 feet at a mounting height of 10 feet.

G. Luminaire Mounted Occupancy Sensors: Designed for direct luminaire installation and control, suitable for use with specified luminaires.

H. Power Packs for Low Voltage Occupancy Sensors:

1. Description: Plenum rated, self-contained low voltage class 2 transformer and relay compatible with specified low voltage occupancy sensors for switching of line voltage loads.

2. Provide quantity and configuration of power and slave packs with all associated wiring and accessories as required to control the load indicated on drawings.

3. Input Supply Voltage: Dual rated for 120/277 V ac.

4. Load Rating: As required to control the load indicated on drawings.

I. Power Packs for Wireless Occupancy Sensors:

1. Description: Plenum rated, self-contained relay compatible with specified wireless occupancy sensors for switching of line voltage loads.

2. Input Supply Voltage: Dual rated for 120/277 V ac.

3. Load Rating: As required to control the load indicated on drawings.

2.03 OUTDOOR MOTION SENSORS
A. Description: Factory-assembled wet location listed device suitable for wall or ceiling/eave mounting, with integral swivel for field adjustment of coverage, capable of detecting motion for automatic control of load indicated.

B. Sensor Technology: Passive Infrared (PIR) designed to detect occupancy by sensing movement of thermal energy between zones.

C. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, motion sensor to turn load on when motion is detected and to turn load off when no motion is detected during an adjustable turn-off delay time interval.

D. Turn-Off Delay: Field adjustable, with time delay settings available up to 15 minutes.

E. Integral Photocell: For dusk to dawn operation.

F. Manual Override: Activated by switching power off to unit and then back on.

G. Load Rating: 1,000 W incandescent and fluorescent load at 120 V ac.

H. Coverage: Capable of detecting motion within a distance of 50 feet at a mounting height of 8 feet, with a field of view of 270 degrees.

2.04 TIME SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers:

1. Intermatic, Inc: www.intermatic.com/#sle.

2. Tork, a division of NSI Industries LLC: www.tork.com/#sle.

3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

4. Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.

B. Digital Electronic Time Switches:

1. Description: Factory-assembled solid state programmable controller with LCD display, listed and labeled as complying with UL 916 or UL 917.

2. Program Capability:
a. 24-Hour Time Switches: Single channel, with same schedule for each day of the week and skip-a-day feature to omit selected days.
b. 7-Day Time Switches: Single channel, capable of different schedule for each day of the week with additional holiday schedule available to override normal schedule for selected days.
c. Astronomic Time Switches: Single channel, capable of different schedule for each day of the week with additional holiday schedule available to override normal schedule for selected days and field-configurable astronomic feature to automatically adjust for seasonal changes in sunrise and sunset times.

3. Schedule Capacity: Not less than 16 programmable on/off operations.

4. Provide automatic daylight savings time and leap year compensation.

5. Provide power outage backup to retain programming and maintain clock.

6. Manual override: Capable of overriding current schedule both permanently and temporarily until next scheduled event.

7. Input Supply Voltage: As indicated on the drawings.

8. Output Switch Configuration: As required to control the load indicated on drawings.

9. Output Switch Contact Ratings: As required to control the load indicated on drawings.

10. Provide lockable enclosure; environmental type per NEMA 250 as specified for the following installation locations:

2.05 IN-WALL TIME SWITCHES

2.06 IN-WALL INTERVAL TIMERS

2.07 OUTDOOR PHOTO CONTROLS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Intermatic, Inc: www.intermatic.com/#sle.

2. Tork, a division of NSI Industries LLC: www.tork.com/#sle.

B. Stem-Mounted Outdoor Photo Controls:

1. Description: Direct-wired photo control unit with threaded conduit mounting stem and field-adjustable swivel base, listed and labeled as complying with UL 773A.

2. Housing: Weatherproof, impact resistant polycarbonate.

3. Photo Sensor: Cadmium sulfide.

4. Provide external sliding shield for field adjustment of light level activation.

5. Light Level Activation: 1 to 5 footcandles turn-on and 3 to 1 turn-off to turn-on ratio with delayed turn-off.

6. Voltage: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings.

7. Failure Mode: Fails to the on position.

8. Load Rating: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings.

9. Provide accessory wall-mounting bracket where indicated or as required to complete installation.

C. Locking Receptacle-Mounted Outdoor Photo Controls

1. Description: Plug-in locking type photo control unit complying with ANSI C136.10 for mounting on a compatible receptacle, listed and labeled as complying with UL 773.

2. Housing: Weatherproof, impact resistant UV stabilized polypropylene, color to be selected.

3. Photo Sensor: Cadmium sulfide.

4. Light Level Activation: 1 to 3 footcandles turn-on and 1.5 to 1 turn-off to turn-on ratio with instant turn-on and delayed turn-off.

5. Voltage: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings.

6. Failure Mode: Fails to the on position.

7. Load Rating: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings.

8. Surge Protection: 160 joule metal oxide varistor.

9. Provide the following accessories where indicated or as required to complete installation:
a. Receptacle: Complying with ANSI C136.10.
b. Mounting Bracket.
c. Shorting Cap: Suitable for replacing locking photo control to complete circuit.

2.08 DAYLIGHTING CONTROLS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Control Solutions: www.hubbell.com/hubbellcontrolsolutions/en/#sle.

2. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com/#sle.

3. Sensor Switch Inc: www.sensorswitch.com/#sle.

4. WattStopper: www.wattstopper.com/#sle.

B. System Description: Control system consisting of photo sensors and compatible control modules and power packs, contactors, or relays as required for automatic control of load indicated according to available natural light; capable of integrating with occupancy sensors and manual override controls.

C. Daylighting Control Photo Sensors: Low voltage class 2 photo sensor units with output signal proportional to the measured light level and provision for zero or offset based signal.

1. Sensor Type: Filtered silicon photo diode.

2. Sensor Range:
a. Indoor Photo Sensors: 5 to 100 footcandles.
b. Outdoor Photo Sensors: 5 to 250 footcandles.
c. Atrium Photo Sensors: 200 to 2,500 footcandles.
d. Skylight Photo Sensors: 1,000 to 6,000 footcandles. e. Open Loop Photo Sensors: 3 to 6,000 footcandles.

3. Finish: White unless otherwise indicated.

4. Where wired sensors are indicated, wireless sensors are acceptable provided that all components and wiring modifications necessary for proper operation are included.

5. Wireless Daylighting Control Photo Sensors:
a. RF Range: 30 feet through typical construction materials. b. Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI) Limits:

Comply with FCC requirements of 47 CFR 15, for Class B application. c. Power: Battery-operated with minimum ten-year battery life. d. Products:
1) Lutron Radio Powr Savr Wireless Sensors; www.lutron.com/#sle.

D. Dimming Photo Sensors: Photo sensor units with integral controller compatible with specified dimming ballasts, for direct continuous dimming of up to 50 ballasts.

E. Daylighting Control Switching Modules for Low Voltage Sensors: Low voltage class 2 control unit compatible with specified photo sensors, for switching of compatible power packs, contactors, or relays in response to changes in measured light levels according to selected settings.

1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, load to be turned on when light level is below selected low set point and load to be turned off when light level is above selected high set point, with a no switching dead band between set points to prevent unwanted cycling.

2. Input Delay: To prevent unwanted cycling due to intermittent light level fluctuations.

3. Control Capability:
a. Single Zone Switching Modules: Capable of controlling one programmable channel.

F. Daylighting Control Switching Modules for Wireless Sensors:

1. Description: Plenum rated, self-contained relay compatible with specified wireless photo sensors for switching of line voltage loads in response to changes in measured light levels according to selected settings.

2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, load to be turned on when light level is below selected low set point and load to be turned off when light level is above selected high set point, with a no switching dead band between set points to prevent unwanted cycling.

3. Input Delay: To prevent unwanted cycling due to intermittent light level fluctuations.

4. Control Capability: Capable of controlling one programmable channel.

5. Input Supply Voltage: Dual rated for 120/277 V ac.

G. Daylighting Control Dimming Modules for Low Voltage Sensors: Low voltage class 2 control unit compatible with specified photo sensors and with specified dimming ballasts, for both continuous dimming of compatible dimming ballasts and switching of compatible power packs, contactors, or relays in response to changes in measured light levels according to selected settings.

1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, specified load to be continuously brightened as not enough daylight becomes available and continuously dimmed as enough daylight becomes available.

2. Control Capability: Capable of controlling up to three separately programmable channels, with up to 50 ballasts per channel.

3. Dimming and Fade Rates: Adjustable from 5 to 60 seconds.

4. Cut-Off Delay: Selectable and adjustable from 0 to 20 minutes.

H. Daylighting Control Dimming Modules for Wireless Sensors:

1. Description: Plenum rated control unit compatible with specified wireless photo sensors and with specified dimming ballasts, for continuous dimming of compatible dimming ballasts in response to changes in measured light levels according to selected settings.

2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, specified load to be continuously brightened as not enough daylight becomes available and continuously dimmed as enough daylight becomes available.

3. Load to be turned off when available daylight is sufficient to fully dim the load, after the selected time delay.

4. Control Capability: Capable of controlling up to 32 ballasts with up to two separately programmable daylighting zones.

I. Power Packs for Low Voltage Daylighting Control Modules:

1. Description: Plenum rated, self-contained low voltage class 2 transformer and relay compatible with specified low voltage daylighting control modules for switching of line voltage loads. Provide quantity and configuration of power and slave packs with all associated wiring and accessories as required to control the load indicated on drawings.

2. Input Supply Voltage: Dual rated for 120/277 V ac.

3. Load Ratings: As required to control the load indicated on drawings.

J. Accessories:

1. Where indicated, provide compatible accessory wall switches for manual override control.

2. Where indicated, provide compatible accessory wireless controls for manual override control.
a. Products:
1) Lutron Pico Wireless Controls; www.lutron.com/#sle.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.

E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to lighting control devices.

F. Verify that the service voltage and ratings of lighting control devices are appropriate for the service voltage and load requirements at the location to be installed.

G. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install lighting control devices in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33.16 as required for installation of lighting control devices provided under this section.

1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:
a. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: 48 inches above finished floor. b. In-Wall Time Switches: 48 inches above finished floor. c. In-Wall Interval Timers: 48 inches above finished floor.

2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of lighting control devices unless otherwise indicated.

3. Locate wall switch occupancy sensors on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches from edge of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

C. Install lighting control devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, connect lighting control device grounding terminal or conductor to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

E. Install lighting control devices plumb and level, and held securely in place.

F. Where required and not furnished with lighting control device, provide wall plate in accordance with Section 26 27 26.

G. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29.

H. Where applicable, install lighting control devices and associated wall plates to fit completely flush to mounting surface with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.

I. Identify lighting control devices in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

J. Occupancy Sensor Locations:

1. Location Adjustments: Do not make adjustments to locations without obtaining approval from the Architect.

K. Outdoor Photo Control Locations:

1. Where possible, locate outdoor photo controls with photo sensor facing north. If north facing photo sensor is not possible, install with photo sensor facing east, west, or down.

2. Locate outdoor photo controls so that photo sensors do not face artificial light sources, including light sources controlled by the photo control itself.

L. Install outdoor photo controls so that connections are weatherproof. Do not install photo controls with conduit stem facing up in order to prevent infiltration of water into the photo control.

M. Daylighting Control Photo Sensor Locations:

1. Location Adjustments: Do not make adjustments to locations without obtaining approval from the Architect.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, locate photo sensors for closed loop systems to accurately measure the light level controlled at the designated task location, while minimizing the measured amount of direct light from natural or artificial sources such as windows or pendant luminaires.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, locate photo sensors for open loop systems to accurately measure the level of daylight coming into the space, while minimizing the measured amount of lighting from artificial sources.

N. Combination Enclosed Lighting Contactors:

1. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount lighting contactors such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform.

O. Lamp Burn-In: Operate lamps at full output for minimum of 100 hours or prescribed period per manufacturer's recommendations prior to use with any dimming controls. Replace lamps that fail prematurely due to improper lamp burn-in.

P. Unless otherwise indicated, install power packs for lighting control devices above accessible ceiling or above access panel in inaccessible ceiling near the sensor location.

Q. Unless otherwise indicated, install switches on load side of power packs so that switch does not turn off power pack.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect each lighting control device for damage and defects.

C. Test occupancy sensors to verify proper operation, including time delays and ambient light thresholds where applicable. Verify optimal coverage for entire room or area. Record test results in written report to be included with submittals.

D. Test time switches to verify proper operation.

E. Test outdoor photo controls to verify proper operation, including time delays where applicable.

F. Test daylighting controls to verify proper operation, including light level measurements and time delays where applicable. Record test results in written report to be included with submittals.

G. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective lighting control devices.

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

B. Adjust occupancy sensor settings to minimize undesired activations while optimizing energy savings, and to achieve desired function as indicated or as directed by Architect.

C. Adjust position of directional occupancy sensors and outdoor motion sensors to achieve optimal coverage as required.

D. Where indicated or as directed by Architect, install factory masking material or adjust integral blinders on passive infrared (PIR) and dual technology occupancy sensor lenses to block undesired motion detection.

E. Adjust time switch settings to achieve desired operation schedule as indicated or as directed by Architect. Record settings in written report to be included with submittals.

F. Adjust external sliding shields on outdoor photo controls under optimum lighting conditions to achieve desired turn-on and turn-off activation as indicated or as directed by Architect.

G. Adjust daylighting controls under optimum lighting conditions after all room finishes, furniture, and window treatments have been installed to achieve desired operation as indicated or as directed by Architect. Record settings in written report to be included with submittals. Readjust controls calibrated prior to installation of final room finishes, furniture, and window treatments that do not function properly as determined by Architect.

3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.

3.07 COMMISSIONING
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 12
A. See Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements for commissioning requirements.

3.08 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.

B. See Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.

C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of lighting control devices to Architect, and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.

D. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, programming, and maintenance of lighting control devices.

1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with additional training materials as required.

2. Provide minimum of two hours of training.

3. Instructor: Qualified contractor familiar with the project and with sufficient knowledge of the installed lighting control devices.

4. Location: At project site.

END OF SECTION 26 09 23
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance 26 21 00 - 1
SECTION 26 21 00

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical service requirements.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Materials and installation requirements for cast-in- place concrete equipment pads.

B. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.

C. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

E. Section 26 05 33.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems.

F. Section 26 05 33.23 - Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems: Wireways.

G. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

H. Section 26 23 00 - Low-Voltage Switchgear: Service entrance equipment.

I. Section 26 24 13 - Switchboards: Service entrance equipment.

J. Section 26 24 16 - Panelboards: Service entrance equipment.

K. Section 26 27 13 - Electricity Metering: Non-utility electrical metering.

1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Allowances:

1. See Section 01 21 00 - Allowances, for allowances affecting this section.

2. Include cash allowance for Utility Company charges associated with providing service.

B. Unit Prices:

1. See Section 01 22 00 - Unit Prices, for additional unit price requirements.

2. Primary:
a. Basis of Measurement: By the lineal foot, for each configuration. b. Basis of Payment: Includes all work designated to be provided by Contractor in "Division of Responsibility" under Part 2 article "Electrical Service Requirements" below, including purchase, delivery, and installation.

3. Secondary:
a. Basis of Measurement: By the lineal foot, for each configuration. b. Basis of Payment: Includes all work designated to be provided by Contractor in "Division of Responsibility" under Part 2 article "Electrical Service Requirements" below, including purchase, delivery, and installation.

4. Transformer Pad/Vault:
a. Basis of Measurement: Per unit, for each type.
b. Basis of Payment: Includes purchase, delivery, and installation.

1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Service Point: The point of connection between the facilities of the serving utility and the premises wiring as defined in NFPA 70, and as designated by the Utility Company.

1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code(R) (NESC(R)); 2023.

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.06 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. No later than two weeks following date of the Agreement, notify Utility Company of anticipated date of service.

B. Coordination:

1. Verify the following with Utility Company representative:
a. Utility Company requirements, including division of responsibility. b. Exact location and details of utility point of connection. c. Utility easement requirements.
d. Utility Company charges associated with providing service.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of other utilities or obstructions within the spaces dedicated for electrical service and associated equipment.

3. Coordinate arrangement of service entrance equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

4. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

C. Arrange for Utility Company to provide permanent electrical service. Prepare and submit documentation required by Utility Company.

D. Utility Company charges associated with providing permanent service to be paid by Owner.

E. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section to review service requirements and details with Utility Company representative.

F. Scheduling:

1. Arrange for inspections necessary to obtain Utility Company approval of installation.

1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following:

1. IEEE C2 (National Electrical Safety Code).

2. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code).

3. The requirements of the Utility Company.

B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

C. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Store products indoors in a clean, dry space having a uniform temperature to prevent condensation (including outdoor rated products which are not weatherproof until completely and properly installed). Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

C. Handle products carefully to avoid damage to internal components, enclosure, and finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ELECTRICAL SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide new electrical service consisting of all required conduits, conductors, equipment, metering provisions, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for connection between Utility Company point of supply and service entrance equipment.

B. Electrical Service Characteristics: As indicated on drawings.

C. Utility Company: As indicated on drawings.

D. Division of Responsibility: As indicated on drawings.

E. Products Furnished by Contractor: Comply with Utility Company requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance 26 21 00 - 3
B. Verify that ratings and configurations of service entrance equipment are consistent with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Verify and mark locations of existing underground utilities.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Utility Company requirements.

B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access.

D. Provide required support and attachment components in accordance with Section 26 05 29.

E. Provide grounding and bonding for service entrance equipment in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

F. Identify service entrance equipment, including main service disconnect(s) in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed equipment from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION 26 21 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Low-Voltage Transformers 26 22 00 - 1
SECTION 26 22 00

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. General purpose transformers.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 05 33.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems: Flexible conduit connections.

D. Section 26 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.

1. Includes requirements for the seismic qualification of equipment specified in this section.

E. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

F. Section 26 24 16 - Panelboards.

G. Section 26 27 13 - Electricity Metering: Instrument transformers for electrical metering.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 10 CFR 431, Subpart K - Energy Efficiency Program for Certain Commercial and Industrial Equipment - Distribution Transformers; Current Edition.

B. IEEE C57.94 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Installation, Application, Operation, and Maintenance of Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers; 2015.

C. IEEE C57.96 - IEEE Standard Guide for Loading Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers; 2013.

D. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

E. NECA 409 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Dry-Type Transformers; 2015.

F. NEMA ST 20 - Dry Type Transformers for General Applications; 2021.

G. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2020.

H. NETA ATS - Standard For Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Equipment And Systems; 2021.

I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

J. UL 506 - Standard for Specialty Transformers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 1561 - Standard for Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting.

4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Include voltage, kVA, impedance, tap configurations, insulation system class and rated temperature rise, efficiency, sound level, enclosure ratings, outline and support point dimensions, weight, required clearances, service condition requirements, and installed features.

1. Vibration Isolators: Include attachment method and rated load and deflection.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide dimensioned plan and elevation views of transformers and adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated.

D. Manufacturer's equipment seismic qualification certification.

E. Source Quality Control Test Reports: Include reports for tests designated in NEMA ST 20 as design and routine tests.

F. Field Quality Control Test Reports.

H. Maintenance Data: Include recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

I. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of transformers.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of CEC.

B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

B. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to transformer internal components, enclosure, and finish.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Ambient Temperature: Do not exceed the following maximum temperatures during and after installation of transformers.

1. Greater than 10 kVA: 104 degrees F maximum.

2. Less than 10 kVA: 77 degrees F maximum.

B. Ambient Temperature: Do not exceed 86 degrees F average or 104 degrees F maximum measured during any 24 hour period during and after installation of transformers.

1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. ABB/GE: www.geindustrial.com/#sle.

B. Eaton Corporation www.eaton.com/#sle.

C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle.

D. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com/#sle.

E. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 TRANSFORMERS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Description: Factory-assembled, dry type transformers for 60 Hz operation designed and manufactured in accordance with NEMA ST 20 and listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

B. Unless noted otherwise, transformer ratings indicated are for continuous loading according to IEEE C57.96 under the following service conditions:

1. Altitude: Less than 3,300 feet.

2. Ambient Temperature:
a. Greater than 10 kVA: Not exceeding 104 degrees F.
b. Less than 10 kVA: Not exceeding 77 degrees F.

3. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 86 degrees F average or 104 degrees F maximum measured during any 24 hour period.

C. Core: High grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic permeability and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Keep magnetic flux densities substantially below saturation point, even at 10 percent primary overvoltage. Tightly clamp core laminations to prevent plate movement and maintain consistent pressure throughout core length.

D. Impregnate core and coil assembly with non-hydroscopic thermo-setting varnish to effectively seal out moisture and other contaminants.

E. Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV.

F. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper grounding strap.

G. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.

H. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data, ratings, wiring diagrams, and overload capacity based on rated winding temperature rise.

2.03 GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMERS
A. Description: Self-cooled, two winding transformers listed and labeled as complying with UL 506 or UL 1561; ratings as indicated on the drawings.

B. Primary Voltage: 480 volts delta, 3 phase.

C. Secondary Voltage: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase.

D. Insulation System and Allowable Average Winding Temperature Rise:

1. Less than 15 kVA: Class 180 degrees C insulation system with 115 degrees C average winding temperature rise.

2. 15 kVA and Larger: Class 220 degrees C insulation system with 150 degrees C average winding temperature rise.

E. Coil Conductors: Continuous aluminum windings with terminations brazed or welded.

F. Winding Taps:

1. Less than 3 kVA: None.

2. 3 kVA through 15 kVA: Two 5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.

3. 15 kVA through 300 kVA: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and four 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.

4. 500 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.

G. Energy Efficiency: Comply with 10 CFR 431, Subpart K.

H. Sound Levels: Standard sound levels complying with NEMA ST 20 I. Mounting Provisions:

1. Less than 15 kVA: Suitable for wall mounting.

2. 15 kVA through 75 kVA: Suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting.

3. Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting.

J. Transformer Enclosure: Comply with NEMA ST 20.

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations:

2. Construction: Steel.
a. Less than 15 kVA: Totally enclosed, non-ventilated. b. 15 kVA and Larger: Ventilated.

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey, suitable for outdoor installations.

4. Provide lifting eyes or brackets.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Low-Voltage Transformers 26 22 00 - 4
B. Verify that suitable support frames and anchors are installed where required and that mounting surfaces are ready to receive transformers.

C. Perform pre-installation tests and inspections on transformers per manufacturer's instructions and as specified in NECA 409. Correct deficiencies prior to installation.

D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

E. Provide seismic restraints.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install transformers in accordance with NECA 409 and IEEE C57.94.

D. Use flexible conduit, under the provisions of Section 26 05 33.13, 2 feet minimum length, for connections to transformer case. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.

E. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances as specified on transformer nameplate and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CEC.

F. Install transformers plumb and level.

G. Transformer Support:

1. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29, where not furnished by transformer manufacturer.

2. Use integral transformer flanges to support wall-mounted transformers.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted transformers on properly sized 3 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00.

4. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) to support suspended transformers. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

H. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

I. Remove shipping braces and adjust bolts that attach the core and coil mounting bracket to the enclosure according to manufacturer's recommendations in order to reduce audible noise transmission.

J. Where not factory-installed, install lugs sized as required for termination of conductors as indicated.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS Sections 7.2.1.1 and 7.2.1.2. Tests and inspections listed as optional are not required.

1. 167 kVA single phase, 500 kVA three phase and smaller:
a. Perform turns ratio tests at all tap positions.

2. Larger than 167 kVA single phase and 500 kVA three phase:
a. Verify that control and alarm settings on temperature indicators are as specified. b. Perform excitation-current tests on each phase.
c. Measure the resistance of each winding at each tap connection. d. Perform an applied voltage test on all high- and low-voltage windings-to-ground.

3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments.

B. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from transformer components according to manufacturer's instructions.

B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION 26 22 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Low-Voltage Switchgear 26 23 00 - 1
SECTION 26 23 00

LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Low-voltage (600 V and less) arc-resistant metal-enclosed drawout switchgear and accessories for service and distribution applications.

B. Low-voltage power circuit breakers for switchgear.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.

B. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 26 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.

1. Includes requirements for the seismic qualification of equipment specified in this section.

E. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

F. Section 26 05 73 - Power System Studies: Additional criteria for the selection and adjustment of equipment and associated protective devices specified in this section.

G. Section 26 21 00 - Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance.

1. Includes Utility Company contact information.

H. Section 26 24 13 - Switchboards.

I. Section 26 24 19 - Motor-Control Centers.

J. Section 26 25 13 - Low-Voltage Busways.

K. Section 26 27 13 - Electricity Metering: For interface with equipment specified in this section.

L. Section 26 28 13 - Fuses: Fuses for fusible switches.

1. Includes requirements for spare fuses and spare fuse cabinets.

M. Section 26 43 00 - Surge Protective Devices.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI C37.50 - American National Standard for Switchgear - Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used In Enclosures - Test Procedures; 2018.

B. ANSI C37.51 - American National Standard for Switchgear - Metal-Enclosed Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear Assemblies - Conformance Test Procedures; 2018.

C. IEEE C37.13 - IEEE Standard for Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures; 2015.

D. IEEE C37.16 - IEEE Standard for Preferred Ratings, Related Requirements, and Application Recommendations for Low-Voltage AC (635 V and below) and DC (3200 V and below) Power Circuit Breakers; 2009.

E. IEEE C37.17 - IEEE Standard for Trip Systems for Low-Voltage (1000 V and below) AC and General Purpose (1500 V and below) DC Power Circuit Breakers; 2022.

F. IEEE C37.20.1 - IEEE Standard for Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage (1000 Vac and Below, 3200 Vdc and Below) Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear; 2015, with Amendment (2020).

G. IEEE C37.20.7 - IEEE Guide for Testing Switchgear Rated up to 52 kV for Internal Arcing Faults; 2017 (Corrigendum 2021).

H. IEEE C57.13 - IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers; 2016.

I. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

J. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2020.

K. NETA ATS - Standard For Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Equipment And Systems; 2021.

L. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

M. UL 869A - Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

N. UL 1053 - Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Low-Voltage Switchgear 26 23 00 - 2
O. UL 1066 - Low-Voltage AC and DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 1558 - Switchgear; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

4. Coordinate with manufacturer to provide shipping splits suitable for the dimensional constraints of the installation.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Service Entrance Switchgear:

1. Coordinate with Utility Company to provide switchgear with suitable provisions for electrical service and utility metering, where applicable.

2. Coordinate with Owner to arrange for Utility Company required access to equipment for installation and maintenance.

3. See Section 26 21 00 for Utility Company contact information and additional requirements.

4. Obtain Utility Company approval of switchgear prior to fabrication.

5. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section to review requirements with Utility Company representative.

6. Arrange for inspections necessary to obtain Utility Company approval of installation.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for switchgear, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, voltage, bus ampacities, overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, short-time current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories.

1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of switchgear and adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated.

2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections.

3. Include documentation demonstrating selective coordination upon request.

4. Include key-type mechanical interlock scheme with sequence of operations, as applicable.

5. Include proposed mimic bus single-line diagram arrangement.

6. Arc-Resistant Switchgear: Include proposed plenum arrangement, where applicable.

7. Identify mounting conditions required for equipment seismic qualification.

D. Manufacturer's equipment seismic qualification certification.

E. Service Entrance Switchgear: Include documentation of Utility Company approval of switchgear.

F. Source Quality Control Test Reports: Include reports for tests designated in IEEE C37.20.1 as production tests.

H. Field Quality Control Test Reports.

I. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of switchgear and final equipment settings.

J. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Low-Voltage Switchgear 26 23 00 - 3
K. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

2. Enclosure Keys: Two of each different key.

3. Circuit Breakers:
a. Handles Necessary for Racking of Devices: One for each electrical room containing drawout switchgear.
b. Lifting Yokes: One of each different yoke required, for each electrical room containing drawout switchgear.
c. Removable Covers: One for blocking each different opening size when circuit breaker is temporarily removed from its compartment.

4. See Section 26 28 13 for requirements for spare fuses and spare fuse cabinets.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of CEC.

B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchgear in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and IEEE C37.20.1.

B. Store in a clean, dry space having a uniform temperature to prevent condensation (including outdoor switchgear, which is not weatherproof until completely and properly installed). Where necessary, provide temporary enclosure space heaters or temporary power for permanent factory-installed space heaters.

C. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

D. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchgear internal components, enclosure, and finish.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain field conditions within required service conditions during and after installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Low-Voltage Switchgear - Basis of Design.

B. Low-Voltage Switchgear - Other Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. ABB/GE: www.geindustrial.com/#sle.

2. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle.

3. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle.

4. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com/#sle. PREFERRED BY CLIENT C. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
A. Provide switchgear assemblies consisting of all required components, control power transformers, instrumentation and control wiring, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Description: Dead-front standard (non-arc-resistant) type metal-enclosed drawout switchgear complying with IEEE C37.20.1 and ANSI C37.51; listed and labeled as complying with UL 1558; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings.

D. Configuration:

1. Compartmentalization: Provide barriered compartments for each overcurrent protective device, distribution bus, and rear cable connection area.

2. Arrangement: Rear accessible, front and rear aligned.

3. Rear Access: Bolted covers.

E. Arc-Resistance Rating:

1. Passes criteria for arc-resistant functionality when tested in accordance with applicable requirements of IEEE C37.20.7 for Type 2 accessibility.

2. Arc exhaust gases must be discharged through a plenum into designated area approved by Architect.

3. Arc resistant rating valid through maximum current of not less than the available fault current at the installed location.

F. Service Entrance Switchgear:

1. Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment according to UL 869A.

2. For solidly-grounded wye systems, provide factory-installed main bonding jumper between neutral and ground busses, and removable neutral disconnecting link for testing purposes.

3. Comply with Utility Company requirements for electrical service.

4. Utility Metering Provisions: Provide separate barriered compartment complying with Utility Company requirements where indicated or where required by Utility Company. Include hinged sealable door and provisions for Utility Company current transformers (CTs), potential transformers (PTs), or potential taps as required.

5. See Section 26 21 00 for additional requirements.

G. Switchgear With Busway Transitions: Configured for bussed connection to busway provided in accordance with Section 26 25 13.

H. Switchgear With Fire Pump Taps: Provide separate bussed vertical section with suitable lugs for fire pump connection to line side of main service disconnect device(s).

I. Provide integral top rail-mounted lifting device where indicated.

J. Seismic Qualification: Provide switchgear and associated components suitable for application under the seismic design criteria specified in Section 26 05 48 where required. Include certification of compliance with submittals.

K. Service Conditions:

1. Provide switchgear and associated components suitable for operation under the following service conditions without derating:
a. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.
b. Ambient Temperature: Between -22 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

2. Provide switchgear and associated components suitable for operation at indicated ratings under the service conditions at the installed location.

L. Short Circuit Current Rating:

1. Provide switchgear with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.

M. Short-Time Current (30-Cycle Withstand) Rating: Equivalent to specified short circuit current rating.

N. Main Devices: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation. Provide top-mounted pullbox as indicated or as required to facilitate installation of incoming feed.

O. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 1558 temperature rise requirements.

1. Main bus (horizontal cross bus) to be fully rated through full length of switchgear.

2. Provide fully rated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated, with a suitable lug for each feeder or branch circuit requiring a neutral connection.

3. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus through full length of switchgear, with a suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

4. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.

5. Ground Bus Material: Copper.

P. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

1. Line Conductor Terminations:
a. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.
b. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.

2. Load Conductor Terminations:
a. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. b. Lug Type:

Q. Enclosures:

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1.
b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.

2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

3. Enclosure Space Heaters:
a. Provide in each switchgear section installed outdoors and in unconditioned indoor spaces.
b. Size according to manufacturer's recommendations for worst case ambient temperature to prevent condensation.
c. Heater Control: Thermostat.
d. Heater Power Source: Provide connection to transformer factory-installed in switchgear or suitable external branch circuit as indicated or as required.

4. Outdoor Enclosures:
a. Enclosure Type: Non-walk-in type unless otherwise indicated. b. Color: Manufacturer's standard.
c. Access Doors: Lockable, with all locks keyed alike. d. Walk-in Enclosure Features:
1) Personnel Doors: Open to exterior; equipped with panic hardware. 2) Aisle lighting, with switch at each access door.
3) GFCI duplex convenience receptacle.

R. Future Provisions:

1. Prepare designated spaces for future installation of devices including bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.

2. Arrange and equip through bus and ground bus to accommodate future installation of additional switchgear sections.

S. Surge Protective Devices: Where factory-installed, internally mounted surge protective devices are provided in accordance with Section 26 43 00, list switchgear as a complete assembly including surge protective device.

T. Ground Fault Protection: Where ground-fault protection is indicated, provide system listed and labeled as complying with UL 1053.

1. Provide separate neutral current sensor where applicable.

U. Arc Flash Energy-Reducing Maintenance Switching: For circuit breakers rated 1200 A or higher, provide a local accessory switch with status indicator light that permits selection of a maintenance mode with alternate electronic trip unit settings for reduced fault clearing time.

V. Owner Metering: Comply with Section 26 27 13.

W. Owner Metering:

1. Provide microprocessor-based digital electrical metering system including all instrument transformers, wiring, and connections necessary for measurements specified.

2. Measured Parameters:
a. Voltage (Volts AC): Line-to-line, line-to-neutral for each phase. b. Current (Amps): For each phase and neutral.
c. Frequency (Hz).
d. Real power (kW): For each phase, 3-phase total.
e. Reactive power (kVAR): For each phase, 3-phase total. f. Apparent power (kVA): For each phase, 3-phase total.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Low-Voltage Switchgear 26 23 00 - 6
g. Power factor.
h. Real energy (kWh).
i. Reactive energy (kVARh).
j. Apparent energy (kVAh).
k. Current demand.
l. Power demand: Real, reactive, and apparent.

3. Meter Accuracy: Plus/minus 1.0 percent.

4. Features:
a. Communications Capability: Compatible with system indicated. Provide all accessories necessary for proper interface.
b. KYZ pulse output.
c. Adjustable demand interval.
d. Remote monitoring capability via PC.

X. Instrument Transformers:

1. Comply with IEEE C57.13.

2. Select suitable ratio, burden, and accuracy as required for connected devices.

3. Current Transformers: Connect secondaries to shorting terminal blocks.

4. Potential Transformers: Include primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means.

2.03 LOW-VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, trip-free low-voltage power circuit breakers with two- step stored energy closing mechanism; 100 percent rated; complying with IEEE C37.13, IEEE C37.16, IEEE C37.17, and ANSI C37.50; listed and labeled as complying with UL 1066; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

B. Interrupting Capacity: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating indicated.

C. Operation:

1. Provide manually operated circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide electrically operated circuit breakers where indicated.

3. Pad-Lock Provision: For preventing circuit breaker closing operation.

D. Construction: Drawout.

1. Allows withdrawal of circuit breaker into test and disconnected positions, with racking position indication (connected, test, disconnected, withdrawn).

2. Provide safety interlock to prevent racking of circuit breaker while in the ON position.

3. Pad-Lock Provision: For preventing circuit breaker drawout operation.

E. Fused Circuit Breakers:

1. Fuses: Class L, selected for coordination with circuit breaker trip units.

2. Blown Fuse Protection: Provide blown fuse protection to trip circuit breaker in the event of the opening, or absence, of a fuse and to prevent closing of circuit breaker until reset operation is performed; provide blown fuse status indication.

3. Where fuse is not integral with circuit breaker and mounted in a separate compartment, provide interlock to prevent fuse access with the circuit breaker in the ON position.

F. Trip Units: Solid state, microprocessor-based, true rms sensing.

1. Provide the following field-adjustable trip response settings:
a. Long time pickup, adjustable by replacing interchangeable trip unit or by setting dial. b. Long time delay.
c. Short time pickup and delay.
d. Instantaneous pickup.
1) Include instantaneous function for feeder circuit breakers. 2) Omit instantaneous function or provide ability to turn instantaneous function off for main and tie circuit breakers.
e. Ground fault pickup and delay where ground fault protection is indicated.

2. Provide zone selective interlocking capability where indicated, capable of communicating with other electronic trip circuit breakers and external ground fault sensing systems to control short time delay and ground fault delay functions for system coordination purposes.

3. Provide communication capability where indicated: Compatible with system indicated.

G. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation:

1. Shunt Trip: Provide coil voltage as required for connection to indicated trip actuator.

2. Auxiliary Switch: SPDT switch suitable for connection to system indicated for indicating when circuit breaker has tripped or been turned off.

3. Undervoltage Release: For tripping circuit breaker upon predetermined drop in coil voltage with field-adjustable time delay to prevent nuisance tripping.

4. Alarm Switch: SPDT switch suitable for connection to system indicated for indicating when circuit breaker has tripped.

5. Truck-Operated Cell Switch: For indicating circuit breaker racking position.

2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Factory test switchgear according to IEEE C37.20.1, including the following production tests on each switchgear assembly or component:

1. Dielectric tests.

2. Mechanical operation tests.

3. Grounding of instrument transformer cases test.

4. Electrical operation and control wiring tests, including polarity and sequence tests.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the switchgear and associated components are consistent with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive switchgear.

D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install switchgear in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and IEEE C37.20.1.

C. Arrange equipment to provide required clearances and maintenance access, including accommodations for drawout circuit breakers.

D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29.

E. Install switchgear plumb and level.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, mount switchgear on properly sized 4 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00.

G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

H. Install all field-installed devices, components, and accessories.

I. Where accessories are not self-powered, provide control power source as indicated or as required to complete installation.

J. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker tripping function settings as indicated.

K. Set field-adjustable ground fault protection pickup and time delay settings as indicated.

L. Identify switchgear in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Provide services of a manufacturer's authorized representative to observe installation and assist in inspection and testing. Include manufacturer's reports with submittals.

C. Disconnect surge protective devices (SPDs) prior to performing any high potential testing.

Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPDs connected.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Low-Voltage Switchgear 26 23 00 - 8
D. Before energizing switchgear, perform preoperation checks in accordance with IEEE C37.20.1.

E. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

F. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.1.

G. Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.1.2 for all main circuit breakers and circuit breakers larger than _____ amperes.

Tests listed as optional are not required.

1. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground.

2. Test functions of the trip unit by means of secondary injection.

H. Ground Fault Protection Systems: Test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as required by NFPA 70.

1. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.14. The insulation-resistance test on control wiring listed as optional is not required.

I. Meters: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.11.2.

J. Instrument Transformers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.10. The dielectric withstand tests on primary windings with secondary windings connected to ground listed as optional are not required.

K. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation.

L. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective switchgear assemblies or associated components.

M. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions taken.

3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

B. Adjust alignment of switchgear covers and doors.

3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from switchgear enclosures and components according to manufacturer's instructions.

B. Repair scratched or marred surfaces to match original factory finish.

3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.

B. See Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.

C. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of switchgear and associated devices.

1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with additional training materials as required.

2. Provide minimum of two hours of training.

3. Instructor: Manufacturer's authorized representative.

4. Location: At project site.

3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed switchgear assemblies from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION 26 23 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Switchboards 26 24 13 - 1
SECTION 26 24 13

SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Low-voltage (600 V and less) switchboards and associated accessories for service and distribution applications.

B. Overcurrent protective devices for switchboards.